c 


Cbe  Tani/evelWot  Chicago 

FCCNDK)  BV  JOHN  D,  /(K  ': 


THE 


REGULATIONS 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


CHICAGO 

ttbe  "UlnlvetsltB  of  Cbicaflo  Prc6g 


^be  inn(\>er0iti?  of  Cblcaao 

POUNDED  BV  JOHN  D.  ROCKEFELLER 


THE 


REGULATIONS 


OF 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


CHICAGO 

XLbc  TUniveretts  of  dbicago  pcess 
1903 


This  codification  of  the  Regulations  of  the  University  was  prepared  by  the 
former  Recorder,  Professor  George  S.  Goodspeed,  under  the  direction  of  a 
committee  appointed  by  the  University  Council.  The  present  edition  is  a 
revision  brought  up  to  date. 

WILLIAM  R.  HARPER, 
Alonzo  K.  Parker,  President. 

Recorder. 

October,  1903. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


I.    Divisions  of  the  University    ------  3 

II.  Officers  of  the  University:  their  position  and  duties         -             -  4 

III.  Ruling  Bodies  :  Their  scope,  function,  and  rules  of  procedure           -  8 

IV.  Official  Etiquette               -             -             -             -             -             -  16 

V.   The  Calendar             ----...  17 

VI.   Admission             -             -             -             -             -             -             -  18 

VII.    Registration,  Classification,  and  Selection  of  Studies             -             -  23 

'VIII.   Instruction            .......  24 

IX.   Discipline,  Absences,  and  Excuses    -             -             -             -             -  33 

X.    Honors  and  Emoluments              .....  35 

XI.  Graduation,  including  Candidacy  and  Requirements  for  Degrees     -  38 

XII.   Student  Affairs     ..--..-  46 

XIII.  Fiscal  Matters             -------  SS 

XIV.  The  University  Press       ...--.  58 
XV.   The  University  Libraries,  Laboratories,  and  Museums           -             -  59 

XVI.   The  University  Extension  Division          ....  64 

XVII.   The  University  Affiliations     ------  66 

Index       -.-----.  69 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2013 


http://archive.org/details/regulations1903univ 


THE    REGULATIONS 


THE    REGULATIONS. 


ARTICLE  I.     DIVISIONS  OF  THE  UNIVERSITY. 

Section  i. — The  University  includes  five  Divi- 
sions :  the  Schools,  Colleges,  and  Academies ; 
the  University  Extension  ;  the  University  Libra- 
ries, Laboratories,  and  Museums  ;  the  University 
Press  ;   the  University  Affiliations. 

Section  2. — The  Schools,  Colleges,  and  Acade- 
mies include  :  the  Graduate  School  of  Arts  and 
Literature,  the  Ogden  (Graduate)  School  of  Sci- 
ence, the  Divinity  School,  the  Law  School,  the 
School  of  Education,  the  College  of  Arts,  the 
College  of  Literature,  the  College  of  Science,  the 
College  of  Commerce  and  Administration,  Uni- 
versity College,  and  the  Academy  for  Boys. 

1.  The  term  "  School "  is  applied  to  those 
groups  of  departments  of  the  University  in 
which  professional  work  or  non-professional 
graduate  work  is  done. 

2.  The  Divinity  School  includes  the  Graduate 
Divinity  School,  the  English  Theological  Semi- 
nary, the  Dano-Norwegian  Theological  Semi- 
nary, and  the  Swedish  Theological  Seminary. 

3.  The  Law  School  is  a  Professional  School, 
and  its  curriculum  covers  one  year  of  pre-legal 
studies  and  a  three  years'  course  of  profes- 
sional law  studies. 

4.  The  Graduate  Schools  (the  Graduate  School 
of  Arts  and  Literature,  and  the  Ogden  [Gradu- 
ate] School  of  Science)  include  all  depart- 
ments of  instruction  in  which  graduate  work  of 
a  non-professional  character  is  done. 

5.  The  School  of  Education  consists  of  the 
College  of  Education,  the  University  High 
School,  which  includes  the  Chicago  Manual 
Training  School,  and  the  Elementary  School. 

6.  The  term  "  College"  is  applied  : 

a.  To  groups  of  students  pursuing  under- 
graduate courses  in  Arts,  Literature,  or  Sci- 
ence respectively,  e.  g.,  the  College  of  Arts, 


the  College  of  Literature,  and  the  College  of 
Science. 

b.  To  groups  of  students  pursuing  courses 
of  undergraduate  study  either  leading  to 
professional  work,  f.  g.,  the  College  of  Edu- 
cation, or  taken  in  particular  places  and 
times,  e.  g.,  University  College. 

c.  To  groups  of  students  within  the  groups 
above  mentioned,  e.  g.,  the  Junior  and  the 
Senior  Colleges.     (See  below,  No.  7.) 

7.  Each  of  the  Colleges,  with  respect  to  its 
work,  is  divided  into  a  Junior  College  and  a 
Senior  College.  The  former  includes  the  first 
half  of  the  curriculum,  commonly  known  as  the 
work  of  the  Freshman  and  Sophomore  classes, 
and  the  latter  the  second  half,  commonly 
known  as  the  work  of  the  Junior  and  Senior 
classes.  Students  in  Divisions  i,  2,  and  3  of 
the  Junior  Colleges  are  called  Upper  Juniors; 
those  in  Divisions  4,  5,  and  6,  Lower  Juniors. 
(See  Art.  VII,  sec.  15.) 

8.  University  College  includes  the  work  of  the 
Junior  and  Senior  Colleges.  Its  students  meet 
elsewhere  than  in  the  Quadrangles,  and  at  after- 
noon and  evening  hours. 

9.  The  College  of  Commerce  and  Administra- 
tion is  a  technical  College  ;  it  furnishes  groups 
of  undergraduate  courses  concerned  with  the 
special  fields  of  Banking,  Transportation,  Trade 
and  Industry,  and  Journalism. 

10.  The  College  of  Education  furnishes  groups 
of  undergraduate  courses  concerned  with  the 
special  fields  of  Elementary  Education,  Sec- 
ondary Education,  and  Education  in  Arts  and 
Manual  Training. 

11.  The  Academies  are  :  the  University  High 
School,  conducted  by  the  School  of  Education, 
and  the  Academy  for  Boys. 

Section  3. — The  University  Extension  Division 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  II 


includes  the  Lecture-Study  Department,  the  Cor- 
respondence-Study Department,  the  Library  De- 
partment. 

Section  4.— The  University  Libraries,  Laborato- 
ries, and  Museums  include  the  General  Library  and 
all  Departmental  Libraries;  the  General  Museum 
and  all  special  Museums ;  the  Laboratories  of  the 
University  with  their  apparatus  and  materials. 

Section  5. — The  University  Press  includes  the 
Manufacturing  Department,  the  Publication  De- 
partment, the  Circulation  Department,  the  Adver- 
tising Department,  the  Retail  Department,  the 
Laboratory  Supply  Department,  the  Mailing,  and 
the  Shipping  Department. 

Section  6. — The  University  Affiliations  include 
the  work  done  in  connection  with  institutions 
which,  although  not  forming  an  organic  part  of 
the  University,  have  entered  into  the  relationship 
of  affiliation  or  co-operation  with  the  University. 

ARTICLE  II.     OFFICERS  OF  THE  UNIVERSITY: 
THEIR  POSITION  AND  DUTIES. 

Section  i. — The  President  is  the  executive  head 
of  the  University,  exercising  such  supervision  and 
direction  as  will  promote  the  efficiency  of  every 
Department.  He  is  responsible  for  the  discipline 
of  the  University.  He  presides  at  the  meetings 
of  the  Faculties,  and  is  the  official  medium  of 
communication  between  the  Faculties  and  the 
Board  of  Trustees,  and  between  the  students  of 
the  University  and  the  Board  of  Trustees.  He 
recommends  to  the  Board  of  Trustees  appoint- 
ments to  the  several  Faculties.  He  is  responsible 
for  carrying  out  all  measures  officially  agreed 
upon  by  the  Faculties  in  regard  to  matters  com- 
mitted to  them  by  the  Board,  and  such  measures 
concerning  the  internal  administration  of  the 
University  as  the  Board  of  Trustees  may  enact. 
He  allots  Fellowships  among  the  Departments  of 
the  University.  He  makes  an  Annual  Report  to 
the  Board  of  Trustees  of  the  work  and  condition 
of  the  University  in  all  its  Departments. 

Section  2. — The  Chaplain,  in  co-operation  with 
the  President  and  other  officers,  studies  and  pro- 


poses methods  of  promoting  the  spiritual  life  of 
the  University;  officiates  as  needed  in  the  public 
worship  of  the  University;  ministers  as  a  pastor, 
and  acts  as  adviser  to  the  religious  and  benevo- 
lent organizations  of  the  University. 

Section  3. —  The  Recorder  serves  as  secretary  of 
the  various  ruling  bodies  of  the  University,  the 
Board  of  Trustees  excepted.  He  transmits 
monthly  to  all  instructors  a  printed  report  of  the 
actions  of  ruling  bodies.  He  has  charge  of  the 
records  of  courses  taken  by  each  student,  and  the 
rank  attained  in  them,  of  diplomas,  certificates  of 
work,  and  letters  of  dismissal.  He  superintends 
the  preparation  for  printing  of  the  University 
Record,  of  the  Annual  Register,  and  of  the  other 
official  publications  (see  sec.  6).  He  notifies  stu- 
dents of  failures,  conditions,  and  incomplete  or 
defective  work.  The  Recorder  is  permitted  to 
correct  the  records  of  students'  work,  given  by 
instructors,  only  on  authorization  by  the  proper 
Dean  (see  sec.  5). 

Section  4. —  The  Registrar  matriculates  students, 
collects  all  fees,  fines,  charges,  and  rents  due  the 
University  from  students,  assigns  rooms  to  stu- 
dents, and  conducts  an  Exchange  for  the  conven- 
ience of  students  and  instructors. 

Sections. —  The  Deans:  The  Divinity  School, 
the  Faculties  of  Arts,  Literature  and  Science,  the 
Graduate  School  of  Arts  and  Literature,  the  Og- 
den  (Graduate)  School  of  Science,  the  College  of 
Education,  the  Law  School,  the  Senior  Colleges, 
the  Junior  Colleges,  University  College,  the  College 
of  Commerce  and  Administration,  theAcademyfor 
Boys  at  Morgan  Park,  The  University  High  School, 
and  the  Affiliated  Work,  have  each  at  least  one  Dean, 
appointed  by  the  Board  of  Trustees  from  among 
the  members  of  the  Faculty.  There  are  also  Deans 
of  Medical  Affairs  and  a  Dean  of  Women. 

1.  Each  Dean  supervises  in  general  the  admin- 
istration of  his  School,  College,  or  Academy, 
meeting  personally  the  students  and  advising 
with  them  as  to  their  courses  of  study. 

2.  In  the  absence  of  the  President,  the  senior 


Article  II 


THE  REGULATIONS 


5 


Dean  presides  at  all  meetings  of  the  University 
ruling  bodies. 

3.  At  the  opening  of  each  Quarter  the  Dean 
sends  an  "  Official  Class  List"  to  each  instructor 
containing  the  names  of  all  students  who  are 
properly  registered  for  the  course. 

4.  Deans  are  authorized  to  communicate  stu- 
dents' records  to  students  when,  in  the  judg- 
ment of  the  Dean,  it  is  advisable. 

Section  6. —  The  Dean  of  the  Faculties  of  Arts, 
Literature,  and  Science,  has  general  supervision 
of  the  work  in  the  Departments  of  these  Faculties. 
It  is  his  special  duty  to  correlate  the  work  of  the 
various  Divisions,  namely,  the  Junior  Colleges, 
the  Senior  Colleges,  and  the  Graduate  Schools  ;  to 
assign  the  rooms  occupied  by  the  various  Depart- 
ments; to  collect  and  arrange  material  to  be  pub- 
lished by  the  Departments  of  these  Faculties,  with 
a  special  view  to  securing  consistency  in  such  pub- 
lications (see  sec.  3);  to  supervise  the  work  of  all 
Fellows  and  Scholars. 

Section  7. —  The  Dean  of  Women  has  general 
supervision  of  all  women  enrolled  in  the  Univer- 
sity, whether  residents  of  University  halls  or  not. 

Section  8. — The  Dean  of  a  College  or  School 
administers  the  affairs  of  that  College  or  School. 
This  includes :  (i)  correspondence  with  students 
asking  for  information  ;  (2)  the  admission  of  stu- 
dents; (3)  matriculation  ;  (4)  personal  consulta- 
tion with  students  about  their  courses  of  study ; 
(5)  supervision  of  the  work  of  students  in  resi- 
dence; (6)  special  supervision  of  courses  of  in- 
struction offered  in  connection  with  the  College 
or  School  of  which  he  is  Dean. 

Section  9. —  The  Dean  in  a  College  or  School  acts 
as  an  assistant  to  the  Dean  of  the  College  or 
School,  the  special  work  being  assigned  by  the 
latter. 

Section  10. — The  Directors :  The  University 
Libraries,  the  University  Laboratories  and  Muse- 
ums, the  University  Extension,  the  School  of 
Education,  the  University  Houses,  the  University 
Affiliations  and  the  Co-operating  Work  are  each 


under  the  general  charge  of  a  Director,  appointed 
by  the  Board  of  Trustees  from  the  members  of  the 
University  Faculties.  The  University  Press  and 
the  Division  of  Physical  Culture  and  Athletics 
are  also  each  under  the  charge  of  a  Director. 

Section  11. — The  Director  is  the  chief  executive 
officer,  under  the  President,  in  the  conduct  of  a 
special  Department  or  group  of  Departments,  or 
of  a  Division. 

Section  12.— The  Lecturers  and  Teachers  of 
the  University  are  classified  as  follows :  The 
Professor,  the  Associate  Professor,  the  Assistant 
Professor,  the  Instructor,  the  Associate  Instructor, 
the  Assistant  Instructor,  the  Reader,  the  Docent, 
and  the  Fellow. 

1.  Other  members  of  the  teaching  staff  are  the 
Professorial  Lecturer,  the  Non-Resident  In- 
structor, the  University  Preacher,  the  Official 
Tutor.  The  Professorial  Lecturer  and  the  Uni- 
versity Preacher  have  the  rank  of  Professor. 

2.  All  Lecturers  and  Teachers  above  the  rank 
of  Assistant  Professor  are  on  permanent  ap- 
pointment. 

3.  The  tenure  of  office  of  Assistant  Professors 
is  four  years  ;  of  Instructors,  three  years  ;  of 
Associates,  two  years ;  of  Assistants,  Readers, 
Docents,  and  Fellows,  one  year.  At  the  end 
of  the  specified  term  the  connection  with  the 
University  of  an  Assistant  Professor,  Instruc- 
tor, Associate  Instructor,  Assistant  Instructor, 
Reader,  Docent,  or  Fellow,  ceases  unless  he  be 
reappointed. 

Section  13. —  The  Head  of  a  Department  of 
Instruction  is  the  chief  executive  officer,  under 
the  President,  in  the  organization  and  conduct  of 
the  Department. 

1.  Heads  of  Departments  zx^  ex-officio  members 
of  the  University  Senate. 

2.  The  Head  of  a  Department  makes  recom- 
mendations to  the  President  on  all  matters 
relating  to  instruction  and  finance  within  the 
Department.  An  annual  statement  on  these 
matters  for  the  next  ensuing  fiscal  year  is  sent 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  II 


to  the  Dean  (or  Director),  for  transmission  to 
the  President,  early  in  the  Autumn  Quarter. 

3.  The  Head  of  a  Department  arranges  with  the 
Dean  (or  Director):  {a)  The  programme  of 
instruction  for  the  year.  This  is  arranged  early 
in  the  Winter  Quarter  for  the  next  ensuing 
University  year.  {I))  The  revised  schedule  of 
instruction  for  each  Quarter.  Early  in  each 
Quarter  the  schedule  is  revised  for  the  next 
Quarter.  {c)  The  candidacy  of  students  for 
higher  (or  professional)  degrees,  (d)  The  ex- 
aminations of  candidates  for  higher  degrees. 
(e)  The  filing  of  Masters'  and  Doctors'  theses. 
(/)  The  assignment  of  rooms  for  the  Depart- 
ment. 

4.  The  Head  of  a  Department  edits  the  depart- 
mental journal  (see  Art.  XIV,  sec.  3,  no.  2),  con- 
ducts the  departmental  Seminar  (see  Art.  VHI, 
sec.  24),  and  supervises  the  departmental  Club. 

5.  In  case  of  vacancy  in  the  headship  of  a 
Department,  or  in  case  of  the  absence  or  disa- 
bility of  the  Head,  an  Acting  Head  may  be 
designated  by  the  President.  An  Acting  Head 
is  not  a  member  of  the  University  Senate  ex- 
cept by  election  of  the  Board  of  Trustees. 
Section  14. —  Duties  and  Privileges  of  instruc- 
tors are  as  follows  : 

1.  Each  resident  instructor  gives  instruction 
at  least  three  Quarters  during  the  year,  ten 
hours  a  week  or  its  equivalent. 

2.  The  instructor  takes  his  vacation  in  any  one 
of  the  four  Quarters  as  may  be  arranged,  or 
takes  two  vacations  of  six  weeks  each  at  differ- 
ent periods  of  the  year. 

3.  For  every  Quarter  or  Term,  in  addition  to 
the  minimum  required,  the  instructor  receives, 
according  as  it  may  be  arranged  by  the  Presi- 
dent, either  an  extra  two-thirds  pro  rata  salary, 
payable  monthly  during  such  vacation  period, 
or  an  extra  full  pro  rata  vacation.  In  case  of 
resignation  or  death,  vacation  credit  thus  earned 
is  paid  on  the  basis  of  two-thirds  pro  rata  salary. 

4.  Instructors  appointed  for  one  year  attend 
the  meetings  of  the  Faculty   with  which   their 


work  is  connected,  and  take  part  in  the  delib- 
erations, but  do  not  vote. 

5.  Instructors  are  present  in  their  Department 
rooms  on  the  first  day  of  each  Quarter  for  con- 
sultation with  students  during  the  hours  previ- 
ously arranged  by  the  Dean. 

6.  Instructors  may  not  change  the  hour  of  the 
meeting  of  classes,  as  published  in  the  Quar- 
terly Announcements,  except  by  permission  of 
the  University  Council. 

7.  Instructors  may  not  receive  into  their  classes 
students  not  properly  authorized  to  attend 
them.  (For  proper  authorization  see  Art.  VII, 
sec.  10.) 

8.  The  names  of  students  present  in  classes 
without  authorization,  and  of  students  listed 
but  not  present,  are  reported  by  the  instructor 
at  once  to  the  Dean  concerned. 

9.  Instructors  may  not  grant  excuses  for  ab- 
sence from  class  exercises  or  examinations. 

10.  Instructors  may  not  change  the  regular 
hours  for  quarterly  examinations,  nor  give  spe- 
cial examinations  to  students  without  written 
authorization  from  the  Dean. 

11.  In  courses  announced  for  the  Junior  and 
Senior  Colleges,  the  instructors  report  to  the 
Dean  concerned  each  Friday  the  absences  and 
the  quality  of  the  work.  Tri-weekly  reports  are 
due  within  five  days  after  blanks  are  sent  from 
the  Dean's  office. 

12.  At  the  close  of  each  course  the  instructor 
reports  to  the  Recorder  the  standing  of  students 
duly  registered  for  it. 

13.  Instructors'  Reports  on  the  standing  of 
students  in  their  respective  courses,  including 
absences  and  grade  of  work,  are  filed  with  the 
Recorder  before  the  close  of  the  third  day  after 
the  quarterly  examination.  The  names  of  in- 
structors who  do  not  comply  with  this  regula- 
tion are  read  at  the  next  meeting  of  the  Faculty 
to  which  they  belong. 

14.  Each  instructor  returns  to  the  office  of 
Information  and  Exchange  at  the  beginning  of 
each  Quarter  a  statement  of  his  courses,  rooms, 


Article  II 


THE  REGULATIONS 


and  hours.  Suitable  forms  are  sent  to  each 
instructor  for  this  purpose. 

15.  Each  instructor  in  the  Department  in 
which  the  dissertation  for  the  higher  degree  is 
prepared  and  printed,  is  entitled  to  one  copy 
of  the  dissertation  on  personal  application  to 
the  Librarian  (see  Art.  XI,  sec.  10,  no.  12). 
Section  15. — University  Docentships  are  subject 
to  the  following  special  regulations  : 

1.  The  appointment  to  a  Docentship  is  re- 
stricted, except  in  rare  instances,  to  those  who 
have  received  from  an  approved  institution  the 
degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy. 

2.  The  application  for  a  Docentship  is  ad- 
dressed to  the  President  of  the  University. 
Such  applications  are  accompanied  by:  (a)  a 
brief  sketch  of  the  life  and  work  of  the  appli- 
cant; {b^  a  catalogue  of  the  institution  from 
which  he  received  his  Bachelor's  degree ;  {c) 
a  detailed  statement  of  the  work  for  which 
the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  was  grant- 
ed ;  ((/)  any  theses  or  papers  of  a  scientific 
character  which  have  been  prepared  by  the  ap- 
plicant, whether  printed  or  otherwise ;  and 
{e)  letters  or  testimonials  from  former  instruc- 
tors in  regard  to  the  applicant's  ability  in  the 
particular  department  in  which  he  desires  a 
Docentship. 

3.  A  Decent  is  not  required  to  enrol  as  a  stu- 
dent. 

4.  The  Docent  is  permitted  to  offer  courses  of 
instruction,  under  the  direction  of  the  Head 
of  his  Department,  in  the  Graduate  Schools 
and  in  the  Colleges  of  the  University ;  but  he 
is  not  allowed  to  offer  more  than  one-half  of 
the  work  of  the  regular  instructor,  it  being 
expected  that  the  remainder  of  his  time  shall  be 
devoted  exclusively  to  original  investigation. 

5.  The  Docent  makes  to  the  President,  at  the 
beginning  of  each  Quarter,  a  written  report, 
indorsed  by  the  Head  of  his  Department,  indi- 
cating the  course  or  courses  of  instruction 
offered  by  him  as  an  officer  of  the  University, 
and  the  line  of  investigation  followed  by  him 


as  a  student,  for  the  current  Quarter,  and  for 
the  previous  Quarter. 

6.  The  Docent  receives  in  compensation  for 
his  work  a  proportionate  amount  of  the  tuition 
fees  of  students  attending  his  courses,  which  is 
reckoned  as  follows  :  $8  from  each  student 
attending  a  Major  course,  and  $4  from  each 
student  attending  a  Minor  course. 

Section  16. — Each  Department  giving  instruc- 
tion in  the  Colleges  nominates  a  member  who, 
on  the  recommendation  of  the  President,  is  ap- 
pointed by  the  Board  of  Trustees  as  Depart- 
mental Examiner  for  that  Department.  For  the 
duties  of  the  Departmental  Examiner  see  Art. 
XVn,  sec.  I,  no.  2,  c;    sec.  9,  nos.  2,  4. 

Section  17. — A  College  Adviser  may  be  selected 
by  a  Junior  College  student  from  the  teaching  staff 
of  the  University.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  adviser  to 
give  counsel  to  the  student  upon  educational  or 
other  subjects  :  {a)  Members  of  the  teaching  staff 
voluntarily  serve  as  advisers.  A  list  of  the  same  is 
kept  by  the  President,  and  is  posted  on  the  official 
bulletin  boards  not  later  than  October  15  of  each 
year,  {b)  Before  November  i  of  each  year  ballots 
giving  the  official  list  of  advisers  for  each  College 
are  distributed  and  prepared.  Each  student  desir- 
ing to  avail  himself  of  the  privilege,  checks,  signs, 
and  files  his  ballot  with  the  proper  Dean. 

Section  18. — A  list  of  official  Tutors  is  authorized 
by  the  University,  to  whom  students  doing  work 
outside  of  classes  may  be  recommended.  The  ap- 
pointment is  made  by  the  President,  on  recom- 
mendation by  the  Head  of  the  Department  in 
which  instruction  is  given.  The  work  of  official 
Tutors  is  under  the  general  supervision  of  the 
Director  of  the  University  Extension  Division. 

Section  19. —  The  Librarian  is  the  chief  executive 
officer,  under  the  President  and  the  Director  of 
Libraries,  Laboratories,  and  Museums,  having 
charge  of  the  libraries  of  the  University. 

Section  20.— Other  Library  officers  are  :  (a)  the 
Superintendent  of  Departmental  Libraries ;  (b') 
the  Library  Inspector;    (c)  the  Library  Advisers. 


8 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  III 


1.  The  Superintendent  of  Departmental  Libra- 
ries directs  the  administration  of  the  depart- 
mental libraries,  makes  recommendations  for 
improvements  needed,  approves  proposed  pur- 
chases, arranges  transfers  of  books  or  periodi- 
cals, refers  proposals  to  the  Administrative 
Board,  confers  with  editors  of  journals  regard- 
ing exchange  of  periodicals. 

2.  The  Library  Inspector  from  the  library  staff 
inspects  each  departmental  library,  makes  regu- 
lar written  reports  upon  its  needs,  and  gives 
notice  of  removal  of  books. 

3.  A  Library  Adviser  is  appointed  for  each 
Department  or  group  of  Departments  by  the 
President  on  recommendation  of  the  Depart- 
ment or  Departments  concerned  (see  Art.  XV, 
sees.  5,  6). 

Section  21. —  All  officers  of  instruction  and  gov- 
ernment are  subject  to  removal  for  inadequate 
performance  of  duty  or  for  misconduct. 

ARTICLE  III.     RULING    BODIES  :     THEIR    SCOPE, 
FUNCTION,  AND  RULES  OF  PROCEDURE. 

Section  i. —  The  Ruling  Bodies  of  the  Univer- 
sity are  the  Board  of  Trustees,  the  University 
Congregation,  the  University  Senate,  the  Univer- 
sity Council,  the  University  Faculties,  and  the 
University  Boards.  In  addition  to  these  there  are 
certain  semi-official  organizations  having  powers 
delegated  to  them  by  the  officers  or  ruling  bodies 
of  the  University  (sees.  8-1 1).  The  powers  of  the 
Board  of  Trustees  are  defined  in  the  charter  of 
the  University. 

Section  2. — The  University  Congregation  con- 
sists of  such  persons  of  the  following  classes  as 
have  been  duly  registered  in  the  roll  of  the  Con- 
gregation kept  by  the  Recorder :  (a)  officers  of 
administration  and  instruction  of  the  rank  of  In- 
structor and  above ;  (J))  Doctors  of  Philosophy  of 
the  University  of  Chicago  ;  (c)  Bachelors  of  Di- 
vinity of  the  University  of  Chicago  of  three  years' 
standing  ;  Masters  of  Arts,  Philosophy,  and  Sci- 
ence of  the  University  of  Chicago  of  five  years' 
standing;  Bachelors  of  Arts,  Philosophy,  and  Sci- 


ence, of  the  University  of  Chicago  of  ten  years' 
standing;  under  the  following  conditions,  viz.: 
not  more  than  five  from  the  Bachelors  of  Divinity ; 
not  more  than  five  from  the  Masters  of  Arts,  Phi- 
losophy, and  Science  ;  and  not  more  than  ten  from 
the  Bachelors  of  Arts,  Philosophy,  and  Science, 
shall  be  elected  yearly  for  a  term  of  ten  years  by 
their  respective  alumni  associations,  each  associa- 
tion having  power  to  fill  vacancies  as  they  occur; 
(d)  officers  of  affiliated  colleges,  when  elected  by 
the  Congregation;  (if)  such  others  as  may  be  rec- 
ommended by  the  Senate  and  elected  by  the  Con- 
gregation to  honorary  membership  —  provided 
that  not  more  than  five  honorary  members  may  be 
elected  yearly. 

1.  The  President,  the  Recorder,  and  the  Chap- 
lain of  the  University  are  ex  officio  officers  of 
the  Congregation.  In  addition  to  these,  the 
Congregation  elects  a  Vice-President,  a  Treas- 
urer, and  a  Marshal.  The  Vice-President  is 
elected  quarterly ;  the  Treasurer  and  the  Mar- 
shal annually.  The  Executive  Committee,  con- 
sisting of  the  officers  of  the  Congregation,  makes 
arrangements  for  the  meetings  of  the  Congre- 
gation. A  special  committee  to  report  at  the 
next  regular  meeting  nominations  for  officers 
is  appointed  by  the  President  at  each  quarterly 
meeting. 

2.  The  Congregation  holds  stated  meetings 
quarterly  in  connection  with  the  Convocation 
exercises  to  consider  subjects  referred  to  it, 
and  to  make  recommendations  to  the  govern- 
ing bodies  of  the  University.  A  special  meet- 
ing of  the  Congregation  may  be  held  after  a 
notice  of  two  weeks  upon  the  call  of  the  Presi- 
dent, of  the  Senate,  of  the  Council,  or  by  a  two- 
thirds  vote  of  any  Faculty. 

3.  If  the  Congregation  formally  disapproves 
a  regulation  enacted  by  any  Faculty  of  the 
University,  it  is  the  duty  of  such  Faculty  within 
four  weeks  to  reconsider  its  action  and  report 
through  the  Senate  or  the  Council  to  the  Con- 
gregation at  its  next  meeting. 

4.  The  Congregation  recommends  to  the  Board 


Article  III 


THE  REGULATIONS 


of  Trustees  the  Convocation  Orator,  and  con- 
ducts the  celebration  of  Founders'  Day.  (See 
Art.  V,  sec.  3.) 

5.  At  the  June  meeting,  the  members  of  the 
Congregation  who  are  (a)  Doctors  of  Philoso- 
phy or  Masters  of  Arts,  Philosophy,  and 
Science  of  the  University;  (b)  Bachelors  of  Di- 
vinity of  the  University;  (^r)  Bachelors  of  Arts, 
Philosophy,  or  Science  of  the  University,  sever- 
ally elect  from  the  permanent  officers  of  the 
University  (see  Art.  II,  sec.  12,  no.  2)  one 
member  to  the  Senate  and  one  member  to  the 
Council,  to  serve  for  one  year.  Absent  mem- 
bers may  deposit  their  votes  with  the  Re- 
corder. 

6.  In  the  meetings  of  the  Congregation  the  or- 
dinary parliamentary  rules  prevail  for  the 
transaction  of  routine  business  and  the  con- 
sideration of  minor  questions.  In  the  consider- 
ation of  important  questions  and  in  all  cases 
in  which  it  is  requested  by  five  members  of 
the  Congregation,  the  differential  mode  of  pro- 
cedure is  followed  (for  the  specifications  of  the 
differential  mode  of  procedure,  see  the  detailed 
Rules  of  the  Congregation). 

7.  Special  provisions  of  procedure  are  as  fol- 
lows : 

a.  The  time  allowed  any  speaker  upon  a 
special  subject  is  limited  to  ten  minutes. 

b.  All  important  business  is  announced  at 
least  twenty  days  previous  to  the  meeting  at 
which  it  is  to  be  considered. 

c.  Members  desiring  to  secure  the  considera- 
tion of  any  subject  communicate  at  least 
twenty-five  days  previous  to  the  meeting 
such  subject  in  writing  to  the  Recorder, 
whose  duty  it  is  to  present  such  subject  to 
the  Executive  Committee  for  submission  to 
the  Congregation. 

d.  Amendments  to  the  rules  may  be  made  at 
any  regular  meeting  on  twenty  days'  previ- 
ous notice.  Rules  may  be  temporarily  sus- 
pended at  any  regular  meeting  by  a  two- 
thirds  vote  of  the  members  present. 


8.  A  Professor,  newly  appointed  to  the  Uni- 
versity, is  formally  introduced  to  the  University 
work  by  making  an  address  before  the  Congre- 
gation. 

9.  A  subject  presented  to  the  Congregation 
for  discussion,  is  assigned  to  a  committee  ap- 
pointed by  the  President  for  its  consideration, 
and  for  the  preparation  of  a  printed  brief  to  be 
forwarded  to  members  of  the  Congregation 
two  weeks  before  the  meeting  at  which  the 
subject  is  to  be  discussed. 

Section  3. —  The  University  Senate  consists  of 
the  President,  the  Recorder,  the  Professors  who 
are  Heads  of  Departments,  Acting  Heads  of  De- 
partments elected  by  the  Board  of  Trustees,  the 
University  Librarian,  the  Director  of  the  Univer- 
sity Extension  Division,  the  Director  of  the 
School  of  Education,  and  members  of  the  Facul- 
ties elected  by  the  Congregation. 

The  Senate  meets  fortnightly  to  consider  the 
educational  work  and  policy  of  the  University. 
Actions  of  all  University  bodies  are  subject  to 
revision  or  reversal  by  the  Senate  in  accordance 
with  the  following  procedure  : 

1.  Legislation  may  be  initiated,  within  their 
respective  competence,  by  the  Senate,  by  the 
Council,  by  the  University  Boards,  or  by  Fac- 
ulties. 

2.  Legislation  on  educational  matters  initiated 
by  legislative  bodies  other  than  the  Senate  be- 
comes valid  unless  disapproved  by  the  Senate 
within  sixty  days,  or  unless  placed  upon  the 
calendar  by  the  Senate  for  consideration. 
Such  legislation  is  placed  upon  the  Senate  cal- 
endar at  the  request  of  any  Senator,  unless  the 
Senate  shall  decide  that  it  is  not  an  educational 
question. 

3.  Action  regarded  by  the  Senate  as  educa- 
tional is  to  be  so  held  and  is,  in  accordance 
with  present  statutes,  final. 

4.  All  authoritative  actions  of  University  Ruling 
Bodies  are  reported  in  printed  form  monthly  to 
each  University  instructor. 

5.  The    President's   veto    on    an    action    of    a 


10 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  III 


Ruling  Body  is  presented  in  writing  and  in- 
serted in  its  minutes. 

6.  For  the  method  followed  by  the  Senate  in 
nominating  candidates  for  honorary  degrees  see 
Art.  XI,  sec.  14. 

Section  4. — The  University  Council  consists  of 
the  President,  the  Recorder,  the  Registrar,  the 
Chaplain,  the  Deans  of  all  Schools,  Colleges,  and 
Academies,  the  Director  of  the  University  Exten- 
sion Division,  the  Director  of  the  University  Libra- 
ries, Laboratories,  and  Museums,  the  Director  of 
the  University  Press,  the  Director  and  the  Dean 
of  the  University  Afifiliations,  the  Director  of  Co- 
operating Work,  the  Director  of  Physical  Culture, 
the  Secretary  to  the  President,  the  Principals  or 
Deans  of  afifiliated  institutions,  and  members  of 
the  Faculties  elected  by  the  Congregation. 

1.  The  Council  holds  stated  meetings  monthly 
to  consider  questions  relating  to  the  adminis- 
tration of  the  University.  The  actions  of 
Faculties  and  University  Boards  upon  such 
questions  are  subject  to  revision  and  reversal 
by  the  Council. 

2.  The  consent  of  the  Council  is  necessary  to 
the  change  of  the  number  of  any  course  from 
that  which  it  bears  in  the  current  announce- 
ments. 

3.  The  consent  of  the  Council  is  necessary  to 
change  the  hour  of  meeting  of  classes  as  pub- 
lished in  the  Quarterly  Announcements. 

4.  The  consent  of  the  Council  is  necessary  to 
obtain  a  title  or  a  degree  in  the  Colleges  in 
absentia. 

5.  The  approval  of  the  Council,  is  necessary  to 
confirm  the  election  of  the  Secretary  of  the 
Christian  Union. 

Section  5.     The  Faculties  are  as  follows  : 

The  Faculty  of  the  Academy  for  Boys. 

The  Faculty  of  the  Junior  Colleges. 

The  Faculty  of  Arts  and  Literature. 

The  Faculty  of  Science,  including  the  Faculty 

of  the  Ogden  (Graduate)  School. 

The  Faculty  of  the  Divinity  School. 

The  Faculty  of  the  School  of  Education. 


The  Faculty  of  Commerce  and  Administration. 
The  Faculty  of  the  Law  School. 

1.  The  Faculty  of  Arts  and  Literature  and  the 
Faculty  of  Science  meet  together  except  when 
otherwise  ordered,  {a)  The  Faculty  of  Arts 
and  Literature  has  charge  of  the  Graduate 
School  of  Arts  and  Literature  and  of  the  Senior 
College  of  Arts  and  Literature.  It  is  divided 
into  three  standing  group  committees :  the 
Committee  of  Philosophy  and  of  the  Social 
Sciences,  the  Committee  of  the  Ancient  Lan- 
guages and  Literatures,  the  Committee  of  the 
Modern  Languages  and  Literatures.  {S)  The 
Faculty  of  Science  has  charge  of  the  Ogden 
(Graduate)  School  of  Science  and  of  the  Senior 
College  of  Science. 

2.  The  Faculty  of  the  Junior  Colleges  consists 
of  all  instructors  announced  to  give  instruc- 
tion at  any  time  during  a  year  in  the  Junior 
Colleges,  (a)  In  the  Junior  College  Faculty 
there  are  standing  committees  on  curriculum 
corresponding  to  each  of  the  group  committees 
above  described,  and  to  such  of  the  professional 
and  technical  Faculties  as  may  desire  special 
preparation  in  the  Junior  Colleges.  The  chair- 
men of  the  several  group  committees  (see  i  (a)) 
and  the  Deans  of  professional  Faculties,  or  some 
other  representatives  therefrom,  are  ex  officio 
members  of  the  Faculty,  and  of  the  respective 
curriculum  committees.  The  chairmen  of  these 
curriculum  committees,  together  with  the  Dean 
of  the  Junior  Colleges,  constitute  the  general 
committee  on  curriculum.  (^)  All  members  of 
the  Junior  College  Faculty  in  Departments 
immediately  concerned  in  any  group  are  mem- 
bers of  the  corresponding  committee,  (c)  Each 
of  these  committees  has  power  over  matters 
which  relate  primarily  to  the  Department  con- 
cerned, and  which  do  not  conflict  with  the  regu- 
lations of  the  Junior  College  Faculty. 

3.  The  affairs  of  the  Senior  Colleges  are  admin- 
istered by  a  Board  constituted  of  the  following 
officers:  {a)  the  President  and  the  Recorder; 
(li)  the  Deans  concerned  with  Senior  College 


Article  III 


THE  REGULATIONS 


II 


students  ;  {c)  two  representatives  each  of  the 
following  groups  of  departments  :  (i)  Ancient 
Languages  and  Literatures;  (2)  Modern  Lan- 
guages and  Literatures ;  (3)  Philosophy  and 
the  Social  Sciences ;  (4)  Mathematics  and  Inor- 
ganic Sciences  ;  (5)  the  Organic  Sciences  ;  (6) 
each  professional  or  technical  Faculty  having 
students  who  are  candidates  for  the  Bachelor's 
degree  ;  namely,  the  Faculty  of  the  Divinity 
School,  the  Board  of  Medical  Affairs,  the  Faculty 
of  Commerce  and  Administration,  the  Faculty 
of  the  Law  School.  The  Board  is  the  stand- 
ing committee  on  Senior  College  affairs  of 
the  United  Faculties  and  of  the  professional 
Faculties. 

4.  The  College  of  Commerce  and  Administra- 
tion is  a  technical  college,  and  its  Faculty 
consists  of  all  instructors  offering  courses  in  the 
curriculum  of  the  College,  and  seven  other  In- 
structors appointed  by  the  Board  of  Trustees. 

5.  The  Faculty  of  the  School  of  Education 
consists  of : 

a.  Five  or  more  members  of  the  University 
at  large,  recommended  by  the  President  and 
appointed  by  the  Board  of  Trustees  for  one 
year  of  service. 

b.  A  representative  of  each  of  the  following 
groups  of  instruction  in  the  Senior  Colleges 
concerned  particularly  with  the  training  of 
teachers  for  secondary  schools:  (i)  History 
and  Civics;  (2)  English  Language  and  Lit- 
erature; (3)  the  Classics;  (4)  Modern  Lan- 
guages; (5)  the  Mathematical  Sciences;  (6) 
the  Physical  Sciences  ;  (7)  the  Earth  Sciences ; 
(8)  the  Biological  Sciences ;  (9)  the  Social 
Sciences,  including  the  Domestic. 

c.  All  persons  engaged  to  give  regular  in- 
struction in  any  of  its  constituent  parts 
during  a  given  year  who  have  a  University 
appointment  for  a  longer  term  than  one  year. 

6.  Each  of  the  other  Faculties  consists  of  all 
instructors  appointed  for  a  longer  term  than 
one  year  to  give  courses  in  connection  with  that 
Faculty  (see  Art.  II,  sec.  12). 


7.  Officers  of  the  University  announced  to  give 
instruction  at  any  time  during  the  year  in  the 
Junior  Colleges  or  in  the  Graduate  Schools  are 
members  of  the  Faculty  of  the  Junior  Colleges 
or  of  the  Faculties  of  the  Graduate  Schools 
respectively. 

8.  Certain  Faculties  have  standing  committees 
appointed  by  the  Faculty  on  the  nomination  of 
the  President  as  follows  : 

In  the  United  Faculties  of  Arts,  Literature,  and 
Science,  committees :  {a)  on  Admission  to  the 
Graduate  Schools ;  (b)  on  Fellowships  and 
Scholarships  ;  {c)  on  Instruction  ;  (d)  on  Educa- 
tional Tendencies  and  Problems. 
In  the  Faculty  of  the  Junior  Colleges,  commit- 
tees :  (a)  on  Scholarships;  (b)  on  Advanced 
Standing;  (<:)  on  Examinations;  (d)  on  Curri- 
culum, and  ((?)  on  Public  Exercises. 
In  the  Faculty  of  the  School  of  Education,  com- 
mittees :  (a)  on  Requirements  for  Admission  ; 
(<5)  on  Credits,  Degrees,  and  Diplomas;  (c)  on 
Extension  Work;  (d)  on  Curriculum  and  Inter- 
relationship, and  (<r)  on  Editorial  Work. 
The  following  general  committees :  College  of 
Education ;  University  High  School ;  Ele- 
mentary School;  Publication;  Library;  Gym- 
nasium; Museums;  Laboratories;  Social  Affairs; 
Observation  and  Practice. 

In  the  Faculty  of  the  Law  School,  committees  : 
(a)  on  Curriculum  ;  {p)  on  Correspondence  and 
Publicity;  (c)  on  Library. 

Section  6. — The  University  Boards  are  as  fol- 
lows :  The  Board  of  the  Senior  Colleges ;  the 
Board  of  the  University  Press ;  the  Board  of  the 
University  Libraries,  Laboratories,  and  Museums  ; 
the  Board  of  University  Affiliations ;  the  Board  of 
Physical  Culture  and  Athletics  ;  the  Board  of  Stu- 
dent Organizations,  Publications,  and  Exhibi- 
tions; the  Board  of  University  Extension;  the 
Board  of  Medical  Affairs;  the  Board  of  the  Chris- 
tian Union  ;  and  the  Board  for  the  Recommenda- 
tion of  Teachers. 

I.  The  University  Boards,  except  the  Board  of 
the  Senior  Colleges  and  the  Board  of  Medical 


12 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  III 


Affairs,  consist  each  of  eight  members  nomi- 
nated from  the  University  Faculties  by  the 
President,  and  appointed  by  the  Board  of 
Trustees.  The  administrative  officers  of  each 
division  are  members  ex  officio  of  their  respec- 
tive Boards.  The  President  is  chairman  of 
each  Board,  and  the  Recorder,  secretary.  For 
the  constitution  of  the  Board  of  Senior  Col- 
leges see  sec.  5,  no.  3. 

2.  The  editors-in-chief  of  the  several  depart- 
mental journals  are  members  ex  officio  of  the 
Board  of  the  University  Press. 

3.  The  several  departmental  examiners  are 
members  ex  officio  of  the  Board  of  Affiliations. 

4.  The  Director  of  the  University  Press  is  an 
ex  officio  member  of  the  Board  of  Libraries, 
Laboratories,  and  Museums. 

5.  The  Director  of  University  Houses  is  an  ex 
officio  member  of  the  Board  of  Student  Organ- 
izations, Publications,  and  Exhibitions. 

6.  Library  Advisers  who  represent  libraries 
made  up  of  three  or  four  groups  (see  Art.  XV, 
sec.  6)  are  members  ex  officio  of  the  Board  of 
Libraries,  Laboratories,  and  Museums. 

7.  Representatives  elected  annually  by  the 
students,  under  regulations  prescribed  by  the 
University,  act  with  the  Board  of  Physical  Cul- 
ture and  Athletics  on  questions  affecting  ath- 
letic interests.  These  representatives  are  elected 
as  follows  : 

a.  In  the  case  of  the  Colleges  :  (i)  Each  of 
the  Councils  of  the  Colleges  for  the  Winter 
Quarter  nominates  during  the  first  week  of 
March  three  candidates  to  represent  its  re- 
spective College.  A  petition  signed  by  20 
per  cent,  of  the  students  of  either  College 
presented  to  the  chairman  of  the  Council 
may  nominate  a  candidate.  (2)  Within  one 
week  thereafter  elections  by  ballot  are  held 
in  the  assemblies  of  the  respective  Colleges. 
(3)  A  majority  of  the  votes  cast  elects.  If  no 
candidate  has  a  majority  at  the  first  ballot, 
the  election  proceeds  by  the  successive  elimi- 
nation of  candidates  having  the  least  number 


of  votes.  (4)  The  term  of  office  is  one  year 
(four  consecutive  Quarters).  Vacancies  are 
filled  by  an  election,  ordered  by  the  Council 
of  the  College. 

b.  For  the  Graduate  and  Professional  Schools  : 
(i)  Each  of  the  Councils  of  the  Professional 
Schools  nominates  during  the  first  week  of 
March  two  candidates  to  represent  its  re- 
spective School.  One  of  those  nominated  in 
each  School  is  a  graduate  of  the  University. 
A  petition  signed  by  twenty  professional  stu- 
dents and  presented  to  the  chairman  of  the 
Council  may  nominate  a  candidate.  (2) 
Within  one  week  thereafter  the  elections  by 
ballot  are  held  in  the  assemblies  of  the 
Schools.  A  majority  of  the  votes  cast  elects. 
(3)  The  term  of  office  is  one  year  (four  con- 
secutive Quarters).  Vacancies  are  filled  by 
an  election  ordered  by  the  Council  of  the 
School. 
8.  Each  Department  of  the  Colleges  of  Arts, 
Literature,  and  Science  is  entitled  to  one  rep- 
resentative on  the  Board  for  the  Recommenda- 
tion of  Teachers. 

Section  7. — The  University  Boards  administer 
the  work  connected  with  the  official  publications 
of  the  University  Press  ;  the  management  of  the 
Libraries,  Laboratories,  and  Museums  ;  the  Uni- 
versity Extension  ;  the  University  Affiliations  ; 
the  Division  of  Physical  Culture  and  Athletics; 
the  supervision  of  student  organizations,  student 
publications,  and  student  exhibitions ;  religious 
work;  and  medical  affairs. 

1.  These  Boards  sustain  the  same  relation  to 
the  University  Senate  and  the  University  Coun- 
cil as  do  the  various  Faculties  of  the  University. 

2.  For  the  special  regulations  of  the  Boards 
of  Libraries,  Laboratories,  and  Museums,  of 
University  Affiliations,  of  the  University  Press, 
and  of  the  University  Extension,  see  Articles 
XIV  to  XVII. 

3.  The  Administrative  Board  of  Student  Or- 
ganizations, Publications,  and  Exhibitions  is 
charged  with  the  execution  of  University  regu- 


Article  III 


THE  REGULATIONS 


13 


lations  bearing  upon  University  houses,  stu- 
dent secret  organizations  and  societies,  and 
student  publications.  It  also  supervises  student 
entertainments  and  exhibitions,  and  the  public 
appearances  of  students  in  University  and 
intercollegiate  contests  (except  those  in  ath- 
letics). It  is  the  general  policy  of  the  Board  to 
give  notice  of  three  months  before  putting  into 
effect  new  regulations. 

4.  The  Organization  and  Work  of  the  Board  of 
the  Christian  Union  is  as  follows  : 

a.  Besides  the  members  contemplated  in  sec. 
6,  no.  I,  it  includes  the  ofificers  of  the  Chris- 
tian Union  (see  sec.  8),  the  President  and  the 
Secretary  of  the  Board  of  the  University 
Settlement  and  of  each  religious  society  of 
the  University  recognized  by  the  Board,  and 
two  representatives  of  each  distinct  student 
division,  elected  by  the  members  of  the 
Christian  Union. 

b.  The  Board  directs  the  work  of  the  Chris- 
tian Union,  appointing  standing  committees 
on  public  worship,  Bible  study,  work  in 
philanthropy,  and  such  other  work  as  the 
Union  undertakes.  The  presidents  of  the 
represented  organizations  are  chairmen  of 
the  committees  in  their  respective  depart- 
ments. The  committee  on  philanthropy  is 
identical  with  the  incorporated  Board  of  the 
University  of  Chicago  Settlement.  This 
Board  has  power  to  fill  vacancies  in  its  mem- 
bership according  to  its  own  rules. 

c.  The  President  and  the  Secretary  of  the 
Christian  Union  are  members  ex  officio  of  all 
committees. 

d.  No  work  is  undertaken  in  the  various  de- 
partments of  the  Christian  Union  without 
the  previous  consent  of  the  Board. 

e.  Each  committee  appointed  for  continuous 
service  makes  through  its  chairman  a  monthly 
report  to  the  Board  of  all  work  done  in  its 
department. 

f.  The  Board  presents  quarterly  a  report  of 
its  work  to  the  Christian  Union. 


5.  The  Board  of  Medical  Affairs  consists  of 
eight  members  of  the  University,  and  as  mem- 
bers ex  officio,  the  Heads  or  representatives  of  De- 
partments closely  connected  with  the  work  of 
medical  instruction,  and  ofificers  of  the  Uni- 
versity of  the  rank  of  Associate  Instructor  and 
above,  the  larger  proportion  of  whose  time  is  oc- 
cupied in  giving  instruction  in  medical  courses. 

a.  This  Board  is  given  charge,  under  the  gen- 
eral statutes  of  the  University,  of  the  curricu- 
lum and  the  students  of  the  medical  division. 

b.  Medical  students  who  are  candidates  for 
a  University  degree  are  registered  by  the 
Dean  of  the  Faculty  making  recommenda- 
tions for  the  proposed  degree,  and  are  under 
the  rules  and  regulations  governing  the  stu- 
dents of  that  Faculty,  provided  that  such 
registration  takes  place  after  consultation  with 
the  Dean  of  the  Medical  students,  who  issues 
a  Card  of  Advice  specifying  the  courses  for 
which  the  student  shall  register. 

Section  8. — Certain  organizations  of  members  of 
the  University  are  recognized  as  semi-official. 
I.  The  Christian  Union  is  a  semi-official  organ- 
ization of  all  members  of  the  University,  whether 
instructors  or  students,  on  the  basis  of  those 
elements  of  religious  faith  which  are  held  in 
common.  The  officers  are  a  President,  chosen 
from  the  Faculties  of  the  University;  a  Vice- 
President,  chosen  from  the  student  body;  and 
a  Secretary,  chosen  at  large.  It  is  conducted 
by  the  Board  of  the  Christian  Union  (see  sec.  7, 
no.  4).  Its  administration  is  in  the  hands  of 
the  Chaplain  and  the  President  of  the  Christian 
Union  in  consultation  with  the  President  of  the 
University.  No  subscription  or  any  other  formal 
act  or  payment  of  fees  is  requisite  to  member- 
ship. The  officers  are  elected  annually  in  March 
at  a  special  meeting  called  for  that  purpose  by 
the  President  of  the  Union,  and  they  take  office 
at  the  next  regular  meeting  of  the  Board  of  the 
Christian  Union  in  April.  A  two-thirds  vote  at 
any  regular  meeting  after  a  week's  notice  of  a 
change  proposed  in  the  regulations  may  alter  or 


M 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  III 


amend  the  regulations  of  the  Union.  Fifteen 
members  constitute  a  quorum.  The  elections 
are  by  ballot,  and,  with  the  exception  of  the 
President  and  Secretary,  from  a  double  list  of 
nominees  presented  to  the  Union  one  week 
before  the  annual  meeting  by  a  nominating  com- 
mittee of  five  appointed  by  the  President  of  the 
Union.  In  the  case  of  the  President  there  is 
only  one  name  presented  by  the  committee  ;  but 
ten  or  more  persons  may  unite  in  presenting 
(through  the  committee)  another  name,  if  they 
so  desire.  The  Secretary-Treasurer  is  chosen 
by  the  Board,  subject  to  the  approval  of  the 
University  Council. 

2.  Conferences  of  Departments  having  com- 
mon interests  are  organized  to  consider  ques- 
tions relating  to  the  Departments  belonging  to 
them  and  make  recommendations  to  ruling 
bodies  concerned. 

a.  The  Divinity  Conference  includes  mem- 
bers of  Faculties  particularly  interested  in  the 
work  of  the  Divinity  School  and  giving  in- 
struction to  Divinity  students.  It  meets  with 
the  Divinity  Faculty  at  the  beginning  of  each 
Quarter,  and  upon  other  occasions  upon  call. 
Its  minutes  are  kept  and  its  actions  are  con- 
sidered as  in  the  nature  of  recommendations 
to  the  Faculty  of  the  Divinity  School,  and  are 
regarded  as  actions  of  the  Faculty  of  the  Di- 
vinity School  when  adopted  as  such  at  a  sub- 
sequent meeting  of  that  Faculty. 

b.  A  conference  of  the  Board  of  University 
Affiliations  with  the  High  Schools  and  Acad- 
emies Affiliated  and  Co-operating  with  the 
University  of  Chicago  is  held  annually  on  the 
second  Friday  and  Saturday  of  November. 
In  this  conference  there  are  four  events : 

(i)  Executive  Conference  of  Deans,  Prin- 
cipals, and  Superintendents  of  the  above- 
mentioned  schools  with  the  Board  of 
Affiliations  (Friday  afternoon)  ;  (2)  Annual 
Contests  in  Declamation  between  repre- 
sentatives of  these  schools  (Friday  evening) ; 
(3)  General  Open   Conference  for  all  offi- 


cers,  teachers,  and   friends  of  the  above- 
mentioned    schools    (Saturday  forenoon)  ; 
(4)  Departmental  Conferences  for  the  same 
classes  as  in  3  (Saturday  afternoon). 
The  minutes  of  this  Conference  are  kept  as 
the  minutes  of  the  Board  of  Affiliations,  and 
are  regarded  as  actions  of  the  Board  when 
adopted  as  such  at  a  subsequent  meeting  of 
the  Board. 

The  actions  taken  in  the  Conference  are  re- 
ferred to  the  Faculty  of  the  Ogden  (Graduate) 
School  of  Science,  when  they  relate  to  science. 

c.  The  Historical  Conference  includes  mem- 
bers of  the  Faculties  of  the  Departments  of 
History,  Political  Science,  Political  Econ- 
omy, Sociology,  and  Anthropology. 

d.  The  Classical  Conference  includes  mem- 
bers of  the  Faculties  of  the  Departments  of 
Latin,  Greek,  Sanskrit  and  Indo-European 
Comparative  Philology. 

e.  The  Modern  Language  Conference  in- 
cludes members  of  the  Faculties  of  the  De- 
partments of  the  English,  Romance,  and 
Germanic  Languages. 

The  officers  of  the  Historical,  Classical,  and 
Modern  Language  Conferences  consist  of  a 
Chairman,  elected  annually  by  the  group  of 
Departments  represented,  and  taken  from  each 
Department  in  rotation,  and  a  Secretary, 
elected  annually  from  a  Department  other  than 
that  of  the  Chairman.  The  membership  con- 
sists of  all  officers  of  instruction  in  the  group 
of  the  rank  of  Instructor  and  above. 
It  is  understood  that  the  actions  of  these  Con- 
ferences do  not  supersede  the  actions  of  a 
Faculty,  or  interfere  with  the  rights  of  a  parti- 
cular Department. 

Section  9. — Visiting  Committees  are  appointed 
by  the  Board  of  Trustees. 

1.  Any  Department  may  request  the  appoint- 
ment of  such  a  committee. 

2.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  Visiting  Committee 
to  inspect  the  work  of  the  Department  con- 
cerned, make  recommendations  to  the  Board  of 


Article  III 


THE  REGULATIONS 


15 


Trustees,  and   further  the  work  of  the  Depart- 
ment in  every  practicable  way. 
Section  10. —  To  the  Office  of  Information  and 
Exchange  are  assigned  the  following  duties  : 

1.  It  furnishes  information  concerning  the 
University,  its  organization  and  work. 

a.  It  is  a  distributing  center  to  resident 
instructors  and  students  for  the  official  pub- 
lications of  the  University. 

b.  It  makes  provision  for  the  reception  of 
visitors  to  the  buildings  and  grounds,  and 
provides  for  them  well-informed  guides. 

c.  It  maintains  a  Lost  and  Found  Depart- 
ment. 

d.  It  keeps  the  ofificial  register  of  engage- 
ments of  the  Chapel,  Lecture  Room,  Kent 
Theater,  Haskell  Assembly  Room,  and  Lex- 
ington Hall,  and  posts  the  Weekly  Calendar 
upon  the  various  bulletin  boards. 

e.  It  keeps  rosters  of:  (i)  the  office  hours  of 
the  officers  of  administration  ;  (2)  rooms, 
showing  the  courses  held,  giving  the  hours, 
days,  instructors,  and  titles  of  the  courses, 
upon  the  doors  of  the  respective  class-rooms  ; 
(3)  the  courses,  rooms,  home  address,  and 
hours  of  each  instructor. 

2.  It  directs  the  Faculty  Exchange,  the  Tele- 
phone and  Telegraph  Office. 

3.  It  controls  the  Student  Service  for  all  De- 
partments of  the  University,  and  a  messenger 
service  for  the  conveyance  of  mail  to  and  from 
each  of  the  Halls. 

4.  It  authorizes,  prepares,  and  posts  all  bulletin- 
board  notices.  The  regular  size  of  notices  is  not 
greater  than  6X8  inches,  large  notices  being 
proportional  to  the  importance  of  the  notice. 
No  notice  larger  than  8X24  inches  is  permitted. 

5.  The  Office  is  under  the  administrative  direc- 
tion of  the  President. 

Section  11. — Divinity  Houses  are  allied  with  the 
University  on  the  basis  of  the  following  agreement: 
I.  The  Divinity  House  (in  each  case)  of  the 
University  agrees  to  build  one  or  more  Halls 
at  some  point  in   proximity  to  the  grounds  of 


the  University  of  Chicago,  to  be  called  byname 
or  names  agreed  upon  by  the  parties  to  this 
contract,  it  being  understood  that  the  Hall  or 
Halls  are  used  as  a  home  for  students  of  those 
denominations  attending  the  University;  it 
being  further  understood  that  the  grounds  and 
Halls  are  the  sole  and  exclusive  property  of  said 
Divinity  House  of  the  University. 

2.  The  University  agrees  to  furnish  to  the  stu- 
dents of  said  House  all  the  privileges  of  the 
University  on  the  same  terms  as  to  the  students 
living  in  the  Houses  of  the  University  itself  ; 
it  being  further  understood  that  students 
pursuing  courses  of  theological  studies  are 
admitted  in  accordance  with  the  regulations 
governing  the  Divinity  School,  and  that  said 
students  after  having  completed  the  courses  of 
study  laid  down  by  the  University,  receive  the 
proper  recognition  of  such  work  in  the  form  of 
appropriate  degrees. 

3.  It  is  mutually  agreed  that  the  Divinity 
House  of  the  University  has  the  privilege  of 
nominating  one  or  more  instructors  or  officers, 
who  are  given  general  charge  of  their  said  Hall 
or  Halls  and  of  students  residing  therein  ;  pro- 
vided said  instructors  or  officers  are  elected  by 
the  Board  of  Trustees  of  the  University ;  it 
being  understood 

a.  That  the  officers  of  the  House  are  recog- 
nized as  members  of  the  University;  are  in- 
vited to  confer  with  the  Divinity  Faculty  of 
the  University  on  questions  which  relate  ex- 
clusively to  the  interests  of  the  House  or  its 
members,  and  upon  such  questions  only ; 
and  that  the  House  is  represented  in  the 
University  Council  by  its  principal  officer, 
who  is  called  Dean. 

b.  That  the  officers  of  the  House  give  instruc- 
tion in  connection  with  the  Department  or 
Departments  of  the  University  designated  at 
the  time  of  their  election,  which  instruction 
is  accepted  of  students  in  lieu  of  other  simi- 
lar instruction  offered  by  the  University  in 
accordance  with  the  regulations  of  the  Divi- 
nity School. 


i6 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  IV 


c.  That  the  support  and  maintenance  of  such 
officers  and  instructors  are  provided  by  the 
Divinity  House  of  the  University  ;  it  being 
understood  that  the  University  has  no  finan- 
cial responsibility  in  connection  with  said 
House,  its  officers  or  teachers. 

ARTICLE  IV.     OFFICIAL  ETIQUETTE. 
Section  i. —  The    official    cap    and    gown    are 
worn  on  the  following  occasions  : 

1.  On  all  occasions  on  which  degrees  are  con- 
ferred or  honors  bestowed,  by  instructors  and 
students  participating  in  the  exercises. 

2.  At  all  final  examinations  for  higher  degrees, 
by  instructors  and  students. 

3.  At  the  regular  Chapel  Assembly,  by  those 
who  conduct  the  service,  and  by  members  of 
the  Faculty  in  attendance. 

4.  At  all  public  lectures  delivered  by  instruc- 
tors of  the  University  at  the  University ;  and  at 
public  lectures  delivered  by  instructors  of  the 
University  outside  of  the  University,  in  such 
cases  as  the  instructor  may  deem  best. 

5.  By  students,  at  all  official  public  exhibitions. 

6.  At  official  University  receptions. 

7.  At  meetings  of  the  University  Congregation. 

Section  2. — The  regulations  respecting  the  offi- 
cial dress  are  as  follows  : 

1.  Trustees,  members  of  the  Faculties,  candi- 
dates for  degrees,  and  all  members  of  the  Uni- 
versity participating  in  official  functions  (see 
sec.  i)  are  authorized  to  wear  the  official  dress. 

2.  The  official  dress  consists  of  the  gown,  the 
cap,  and  the  hood. 

3.  The  pattern  and  material  for  gowns,  caps, 
and  hoods  are  those  usually  adopted  by  col- 
leges and  universities. 

4.  The  color  is  black. 

5.  For  the  Bachelor's  and  the  Master's  degrees, 
the  gowns  are  untrimmed.  For  the  Doctor's 
degree  the  gown  is  faced  down  the  front  with 
black  velvet,  with  bars  of  the  same  across  the 
sleeves  ;  or  the  facings  and  cross-bars  may  be  of 
velvet  of  the  same  color  as  the  binding  or  edg- 
ing of  the  hood. 


6.  The  hood  for  the  Doctor's  or  Master's  degree 
is  of  the  customary  length,  not  exceeding  four 
feet ;  that  for  the  Bachelor's  degree,  three- 
fourths  of  that  length.  The  hood  is  lined 
with  maroon.  The  binding  or  edging  is  not 
more  than  six  inches  in  width,  and  is  of  silk, 
satin,  or  velvet,  the  color  distinctive  of  the 
Faculty  to  which  the  degree  pertains  ;  that  is, 
for  the  Faculties  of  Arts,  Literature,  and  Sci- 
ence, white,  dark  blue,  or  yellow;  for  the  Fac- 
ulty of  Theology,  scarlet ;  for  the  Faculty  of 
Law,  purple;  for  the  Faculty  of  Medicine, 
green. 

7.  The  cap  is  ornamented  with  a  long  tassel 
attached  to  the  middle  point  at  the  top.  The 
tassel  of  the  Doctor's  cap  may  be  in  whole  or  in 
part  of  gold  thread. 

8.  Members  of  the  Trustees  are  entitled  during 
their  term  of  office  to  wear  the  gown  of  highest 
dignity,  and,  if  possessed  of  an  academic  de- 
gree, the  hood  appropriate  to  such  degree. 

9.  Members  of  the  Faculties  and  persons  offi- 
cially connected  with  the  University  who  have 
been  recipients  of  academic  honors  from  other 
universities  or  colleges  in  good  standing  may 
assume  the  corresponding  academic  costume  as 
described,  provided  that  such  rights  shall  ter- 
minate when  connection  with  the  University 
ceases. 

10.  Instructors  who  have  received  degrees  from 
other  universities  are  at  liberty  to  wear  hoods 
lined  either  with  the  colors  of  the  university 
conferring  the  degree,  or  with  the  maroon  of 
the  University  of  Chicago. 

11.  These  regulations  apply  to  all  Bachelors, 
Masters,  and  Doctors  receiving  degrees  at  Con- 
vocation, and  to  all  members  of  the  University 
taking  part  in  official  celebrations.  They  pre- 
sent themselves  in  the  cap  and  gown  appro- 
priate to  their  degree. 

12.  The  University  presents  to  each  candidate 
for  the  Doctor's  degree,  duly  qualified,  the 
hood  appropriate  to  the  degree. 

13.  The  hood  of  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts 


Article  V 


THE  REGULATIONS 


17 


or  Master  of  Arts  requires  white  trimming ;  of 
Bachelor  of  Philosophy  or  Master  of  Philoso- 
phy, blue  trimming;  of  Bachelor  of  Science  or 
Master  of  Science,  yellow  trimming.  The  hood 
for  all  degrees  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  given 
by  any  faculty  requires  blue  trimming. 
Section  3. —  It  is  expected  of  instructors: 

1.  That  they  will  be  present  at  the  weekly 
Chapel  Assembly  of  that  School  or  College 
with  which  their  work  is  connected.  If  an 
instructor's  work  connects  him  with  more  than 
one  School  or  College,  he  may  exercise  his 
choice. 

2.  That  they  will  attend  the  meeting  of  the 
Faculty  to  which  they  belong. 

3.  That  they  will  be  present  in  cap  and  gown 
at  the  Quarterly  Convocation. 

4.  That  they  will  report  to  the  Dean  a  contem- 
plated absence  from  the  city  which  involves 
suspension  or  readjustment  of  regular  appoint- 
ments. 

Section  4. —  For  the  etiquette  of  Convocation 
see  Art.  XI,  sec.  12. 

ARTICLE  V.     THE  CALENDAR. 

Section  i. —  The  Academic  year  is  divided  into 
four  Quarters.  Each  Quarter  is  divided  into  two 
Terms.  The  year  begins  with  the  first  day  of  the 
Summer  Quarter.  The  Autumn,  Winter,  and 
Spring  Quarters  begin  on  the  first  day  of  October, 
January,  and  April,  respectively,  and  continue 
twelve  weeks  each.  The  Summer  Quarter  begins 
on  the  day  next  following  the  last  day  of  the 
Spring  Quarter.  Excepting  at  the  end  of  the 
Spring  Quarter,  a  recess,  usually  of  one  week, 
occurs  between  the  close  of  one  Quarter  and  the 
beginning  of  the  next.  About  a  month  intervenes 
between  the  close  of  the  Summer  Quarter  and  the 
beginning  of  the  Autumn  Quarter. 

Section  2. —  A  Quarterly  Convocation  is  held 
during  the  last  week  of  each  Quarter  ;  in  the 
Autumn  and  Winter  Quarters,  on  the  Tuesday 
before  the  Friday  next  preceding  the  twenty-fifth 
day  of  December  and  March,  respectively ;  in  the 


Spring  Quarter,  on  the  Tuesday  of  the  last  week 
of  the  Quarter ;  in  the  Summer  Quarter,  on  the 
last  day  of  the  Quarter. 

Section  3. —  The  Convocation  day  in  June  is 
called  Founder's  Day. 

Section  4. —  The  Quarterly  Examinations  are 
held  in  the  Autumn  and  Winter  Quarters  on  the 
Wednesday,  Thursday,  and  Friday  next  succeed- 
ing the  Convocation  ;  in  the  Spring  Quarter,  on 
the  Wednesday,  Thursday,  and  Friday  of  the 
week  preceding  Convocation.  In  the  Summer 
Quarter  Term  examinations  on  the  last  day  of 
each  Term  are  substituted  for  the  Quarterly  Ex- 
aminations. 

Section  5. —  On  the  day  preceding  Convocation 
the  Convocation  Reception  is  held,  and  in  the 
Spring  Quarter  the  Class  Day  exercises  and  the 
annual  exercises  of  the  Phi  Beta  Kappa  Society. 

Section  6. —  On  the  Sunday  preceding  Convo- 
cation the  Convocation  sermon  is  preached. 

Section  7. —  In  the  Spring  Quarter  no  lectures 
or  class  exercises  occur  on  Convocation  day  or 
the  day  preceding. 

Section  8. —  Entrance  examinations  are  held 
three  times  a  year  within  a  period  of  two  weeks 
preceding  the  beginning  of  each  Quarter  except 
the  Spring  Quarter.  Examinations  may  betaken 
at  other  dates  only  on  permission  of  the  Dean  of 
Afifiliations    and  the    payment  of  a  special    fee. 

Section  9.  —  Official  University  Holidays  are 
observed  on  New  Year  Day,  Lincoln's  Birthday, 
Washington's  Birthday,  Memorial  Day,  Inde- 
pendence Day,  Thanksgiving  Day,  and  the  Friday 
following  Thanksgiving  Day. 

Section  10. —  Seminars  are  held  from  4:00  to 
6:00  P.M. 

Section  11. — The  4  o'clock  hour  on  Wednesdays 
is  left  free  for  general  lectures. 

Section  12. — Division  Lectures  (see  Art.  VIII, 
sec.  5,  no.  3)  are  held  on  Wednesdays  at  10:30  a.  m. 

Section  13. —  Weekly  Chapel  Assemblies  of  the 


i8 


THE   UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  VI 


various  Schools  and  Colleges  are  held  as  follows 
from  10:30  to  II  A.  M.:  On  Monday,  the  Junior 
Colleges;  on  Tuesday,  the  Senior  Colleges;  on 
Thursday,  the  Graduate  Schools ;  on  Friday,  the 
Divinity  School.  The  Assembly  hour  on  Wednes- 
day is  reserved  for  general  meetings  of  the  Uni- 
versity, public  exhibitions,  division  lectures,  etc. 
Section  14. —  A  weekly  religious  service  in  charge 
of  the  University  preacher  is  held  on  Sundays  at 

1 1   A.  M. 

ARTICLE  VI.    ADMISSION. 

Section  i. —  A  student  enters  the  University  by 
admission  to  a  specific  School  or  College. 

Section  2. —  For  regular  admission  to  the  Junior 
Colleges  there  are  required  fifteen  units  of  pre- 
paratory work  in  a  secondary  school  (high  school 
or  academy)  of  high  grade.  (For  unclassified  and 
honorary  students  see  sees.  11  and  12.) 

1.  A  unit  corresponds  to  a  course  of  study  com- 
prising not  less  than  one  hundred  and  fifty  hours 
of  prepared  work,  two  hours  of  laboratory  work 
being  regarded  as  the  equivalent  of  one  hour  of 
prepared  work. 

2.  The  following  work  is  accepted  for  ad- 
mission : 

Civil  Government,  J^  unit. 

History,  i,  2,  3a,  3b,  4a  and  5a,  each  ^  unit;  4b  and 

5b,  each  I  unit. 
Greek,  i  and  2,  2  units ;  3,  I  unit. 
Latin,  I  and  2,  2  units ;  3,  4,  and  5,  2  units. 
French,  i,  2,  and  3,  each  i  unit. 
German,  i,  2,  and  3,  each  i  unit. 
English,  2  units. 

Mathematics,  Algebra  to  Quadratics,  i  unit;  Algebra 
through  Quadratics,  ^  unit ;  Plane  Geometry,  I  unit ; 
Solid  Geometry,  Yz  unit. 
Astronomy,  Yz  unit. 
Physics,  I  unit. 
Chemistry,  i  unit. 
Geology,  Y2  unit. 
Physiography,  ^  or  I  unit. 
General  Biology,  I  unit. 
Zoology,  1^  or  I  unit. 
Botany,  ^  or  i  unit. 
Physiology,  Yi  unit. 

Mechanical  or  Free-Hand  Drawing,  i  unit. 
Biblical  History  and  Literature,  ^  or  i  unit. 

3.  In  connection  with  the  examination  in 
Physics,  Chemistry,  General  Biology,  Zoology 


or  Botany,  the  student's  laboratory  notebooks 
are  presented. 

4.  All  candidates  for  admission  to  the  Junior 
Colleges  present  one  unit  of  History  (Courses 
I  and  2);  two  units  of  Latin  (Courses  i  and  2); 
two  units  of  English;  two  and  one-half  units  of 
Mathematics;  one  unit  of  Physics.  In  addition, 
candidates  for  the  College  of  Arts  present  two 
units  of  Greek.  The  remaining  units  of  the 
fifteen  required  for  admission  are  selected  from 
accepted  subjects  mentioned  in  sec.  2,  no.  2. 

5.  Students  who  fail  to  offer  for  admission  a  full 
fifteen  units,  or  are  unable  to  offer  the  pre- 
scribed units  (see  above,  no.  4),  are  conditioned, 
and  make  up  the  lacking  units  in  the  College, 
either  by  passing  back  University  credits  in  cer- 
tain cases  (see  below,  no.  7),  or  by  outside 
work. 

6.  All  conditions  are  removed  within  one  year 
of  entrance.  If  the  student  fails  to  do  this,  his 
College  work  is  restricted  to  two  courses  each 
Quarter  until  the  conditions  have  been  removed. 

7.  If  the  candidate  offers  units  other  than  those 
recommended  to  the  full  amount  of  fifteen  units, 
the  prescribed  subjects  having  been  offered,  he 
is  admitted  without  condition,  but  the  omitted 
subjects  are  required  in  the  Colleges,  two  Majors 
of  College  work  being  accepted  for  one  unit  of 
preparatory  work.  Not  more  than  a  total  of 
four  units  of  science  is  accepted  for  admission. 

8.  The  University  accepts  the  findings  of  the 
College  Entrance  Examination  Board  of  the 
Middle  States  and  Maryland  so  far  as  they  are 
applicable  for  admission  to  the  Junior  Colleges. 

9.  Admission  is  granted  on  the  basis  of  certifi- 
cates from  certain  schools,  and  by  examination 
in  all  other  cases.  Students  from  the  Academy 
for  Boys,  from  the  University  High  School  (the 
former  South  Side  Academy  and  the  Chicago 
Manual  Training  School  combined),  and  from 
affiliated  and  co-operating  schools  are  admitted 
to  the  Junior  Colleges  on  presentation  of  a  cer- 
tificate covering  the  number  of  units  required 
for  admission. 


Article  VI 


THE  REGULATIONS 


19 


10.  The  Dean  of  Affiliations  is,  for  the  present, 
authorized  to  admit  to  the  Junior  Colleges  can- 
didates presenting  Regents'  certificates  from 
the  state  of  New  York. 

11.  Students  from  academies  connected  with 
colleges  whose  entrance  requirements  and  work 
are  accepted  as  equivalent  to  those  of  the  Uni- 
versity are  admitted  on  certificates  as  in  the 
case  of  co-operating  schools. 

12.  When  entrance  examinations  are  taken  the 
following  regulations  apply: 

a.  Students  who  desire  to  take  examinations 
should  present  themselves  at  the  office  of  the 
Dean  of  Affiliations  and  secure  a  card  of 
admission  to  the  examination  room. 

b.  In  case  candidates  for  admission  wish  to 
take  two  examinations  which  are  scheduled 
for  the  same  hour,  one  of  them  may  be  taken 
during  the  next  succeeding  period,  if  the 
student  has  no  other  examination. 

Section  3. —  For  admission  to  the  Senior  Col- 
leges eighteen  Majors  are  required,  of  which  not 
less  than  fifteen  are  credits  in  the  Junior  College 
curriculum.  Two  Quarters  of  work  in  Public 
Speaking  and  six  Quarters  of  work  in  Physical 
Culture  are  also  required. 

1.  Students  entering  the  University  from  certain 
approved  institutions  in  which  they  have  com- 
pleted two  full  years  of  work  are  admitted  at 
once  to  the  Senior  Colleges. 

2.  Duly  accredited  graduates  of  state  normal 
schools,  maintaining  courses  of  study  extending 
two  years  beyond  the  standard  high-school 
courses  as  determined  by  the  state  universities 
concerned,  may  be  admitted  to  the  Senior  Col- 
leges on  conditions  essentially  the  same  as  those 
required  of  students  from  approved  institutions, 
except  that  credit  is  given  only  for  work  of  an 
academic  or  disciplinary  nature,  exclusive  of 
strictly  professional  work. 

3.  Students  entering  from  the  above  institutions 
with  the  credits  stated  in  i  and  2  present: 

a.  The  customary  letters  of  honorable  dis- 
missal. 


b.  A  certificate  that  the  applicant's  stand- 
ing is  fully  up  to  the  average  standing  of  his 
class. 

4.  Medical  Course  Students  not  registered  as 
Graduate  Students  are  subject  to  the  regula- 
tions of  the  Senior  Colleges. 

5.  The  requirement  of  Physical  Culture  so  far 
as  relates  to  the  portion  of  the  College  course 
previously  completed  is  waived  in  the  case  of 
students  admitted  to  the  Senior  Colleges  from 
other  institutions. 

6.  The  regulations  respecting  admission  with 
advanced  standing  (see  sec.  13)  apply  to  admis- 
sion to  the  Senior  Colleges. 

Section  4. — Admission  to  University  College  is 
granted: 

1.  To  any  student  who  has  completed  the 
amount  of  work  required  for  admission  to  any 
of  the  other  Colleges  of  the  University. 

2.  To  any  teacher  in  active  service  in  Chicago 
or  vicinity  who  has  completed  a  four-years' 
course  in  a  Chicago  high  school  or  the  equiva- 
lent thereof,  on  presentation  of  satisfactory 
evidence  of  the  same  to  the  Dean. 

Section  5.  —  Admission  to  the  Graduate  Schools 
is  granted  to :  (a)  Those  who  have  been  gradu- 
ated from  a  College  of  the  University  of  Chicago 
with  one  of  the  usual  degrees  ;  or  (b)  those  who 
are  graduates  of  other  institutions  of  good  stand- 
ing and  who  hold  degrees  corresponding  to  those 
conferred  by  the  University. 

1.  Applicants  for  admission  to  the  Graduate 
Schools,  not  graduates  of  the  University,  pre- 
sent testimonials  as  to  character  and  scholar- 
ship. Such  testimonials  may  take  the  form  of 
diplomas,  or  of  written  or  printed  theses. 

2.  The  Bachelor's  degree  from  certain  approved 
institutions  is  accepted  without  investigation  as 
equivalent  to  that  of  the  University. 

3.  Admission  to  the  Graduate  Schools  does  not 
in  itself  admit  to  candidacy  for  a  higher  degree. 

4.  For  substitutions  allowed  to  graduate  stu- 
dents as  candidates  for  a  higher  degree  in  the 


20 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  VI 


requirements  for  the  Bachelor's  degree  see  Art. 
XI,  sec.  3,  nos.  4-6. 

5.  For  admission  with  advanced  standing 
granted  to  candidates  for  a  higher  degree  see 
Art.  VIII,  sees.  13  and  14. 

Section  6. —  Admission  (a)  to  the  Graduate  Di- 
vinity School  is  granted  to  all  students  of  ap- 
proved character  who  have  had  a  college  training 
or  its  equivalent;  {b')  to  the  English  Theological 
Seminary,  in  the  Summer  Quarter,  to  approved 
students  who  have  not  had  a  college  training  and 
desire  to  pursue  theological  studies  in  the  English 
language  ;  (<r)  to  the  Swedish  and  Dano-Norwegian 
Theological  Seminaries,  to  approved  students  who 
speak  the  Scandinavian  languages  and  are  pre- 
paring to  preach  or  teach  among  the  Swedish, 
Danish,  or  Norwegian  people,  or  who  by  permis- 
sion of  the  President  or  Deans  attend  lectures 
without  undertaking  the  ordinary  work  of  the 
classroom  (Honorary  Students,  see  below,  sec.  12). 

1.  A  student  entering  the  Divinity  School  pre- 
sents a  Ministerial  License,  a  Certificate  of  Or- 
dination, or  a  statement  from  the  church  of 
which  he  is  a  member,  approving  his  purpose 
to  devote  himself  to  the  ministry  or  other  re- 
ligious service. 

2.  A  student  seeking  admission  to  the  Graduate 
Divinity  School  presents  the  diploma  of  an  ap- 
proved college,  certifying  that  he  has  received 
a  Bachelor's  degree. 

3.  Students  who  are  graduates  of  colleges  in  some 
other  than  the  A.B.  course  are  admitted  with- 
out examination  to  courses  in  which  Greek  is 
not  a  requisite. 

4.  For  admission  to  the  Divinity  School  with 
advanced  standing  see  Art.  VIII,  sec.  14,  no.  4. 

5.  Students  who  bring  a  Bachelor's  degree 
without  Greek  from  a  college  of  good  standing 
will  be  admitted  to  the  Graduate  Divinity 
School  on  these  conditions: 

a.  They  are  required  to  pass  an  examination 
on  or  present  the  certificate  of  approved 
schools   or  teachers  to  the  effect  that  they 


have  done  (two  units)  six  preparatory  Majors 
or  four  college  Majors  (Greek  Grammar  or 
Xenophon's  Anabasis)  as  preliminary  to 
Course  i  in  the  New  Testament  Department. 

b.  If  the  Bachelor's  degree  of  such  student 
is  equal  to  that  of  the  University  of  Chicago 
these  Majors  will  be  credited  as  three  Majors 
toward  the  Divinity  degree. 

c.  If  the  Bachelor's  degree  of  such  student 
be  not  equal  to  the  S.B.  degree  of  the  Uni- 
versity these  Majors  will  be  credited  as  four 
Majors  toward  the  equalization  of  his  Bach- 
elor's degree  with  that  of  the  University  of 
Chicago. 

Section  7. —  Admission    to  the  Law  School  is 
granted  upon  the  following  terms  : 

(i)  In  the  pre-legal  course,  to  students  quali- 
fied for  admission  to  the  Senior  Colleges  (see 
above,  p.  19,  sec.  3).  (2)  In  the  professional 
course,  {a)  to  students  who  have  completed 
the  pre-legal  course ;  ((5)  to  students  who 
are  entitled  to  admission  to  the  Graduate 
Schools  in  accordance  with  the  University  regu- 
lations (the  Bachelor's  degree  from  approved 
institutions  is  accepted  without  investigation,  as 
equivalent  to  that  of  the  University),  and  to  all 
students  who  are  entitled  to  admission  to  the 
Senior  Colleges  with  nine  Majors'  (the  regular 
amount  of  one  year's  work)  advanced  standing. 
This  latter  requirement  is  usually  equivalent 
to  three  years  of  college  work.  Students  ad- 
mitted under  (2)  are  admitted  as  regular  stu- 
dents, and  as  candidates  for  the  Doctor's  de- 
gree in  law.  (3)  In  the  professional  course,  to 
students  over  twenty-one  years  old  who  are 
qualified  to  enter  the  Junior  Colleges.  Such 
students  are  admitted  as  unclassified  students 
and  may  become  candidates  for  the  Bachelor's 
degree  in  law  upon  maintaining  a  high  average 
standing  throughout  their  course.  (4)  Students 
over  twenty-one,  not  qualified  to  enter  the 
Junior  Colleges,  will  in  rare  instances  be  ad- 
mitted as  unclassified  students,  but  will  not 
be    candidates    for    a   degree.      (5)    Students 


Article  VI 


THE  REGULATIONS 


21 


admitted  under  (2)  or  (3)  who  have  done 
work  at  other  law  schools  of  good  standing 
will  receive  not  over  two  years'  credit  for  such 
work. 

Section  8. —  Students  are  admitted  to  three  gen- 
eral lines  of  instruction  in  the  College  of  Educa- 
tion, under  the  following  conditions  : 

1.  Candidates  are  admitted  as  classified  stu- 
dents upon  the  basis  of  two  years'  scholastic 
work  over  and  above  a  high-school  course  of  at 
least  four  years.  This  two  years'  work  may  be 
done  either  in  colleges  or  training  schools  for 
teachers.     It  includes  : 

In  Philosoph)'  (including  Psychology,  Ethics, 

etc.)  and  Education,  Theory  and  Practice       -  2  Mjs. 

English 2  Mjs. 

History  .......  2  Mjs. 

Modern  Language,  other  than  English        -  2  Mjs. 

Mathematics  .-..-.  2  Mjs. 

Science 4  Mjs. 

An  Art I  Mj. 

Electives    -------  3  Mjs. 

2.  Candidates  are  admitted  as  unclassified  stu- 
dents who  are  graduated  from  an  approved 
high  school ;  who  have  had  two  years'  experi- 
ence in  teaching,  have  reached  twenty-one 
years  of  age,  and  show  themselves  prepared 
to  take  up  study  with  advantage  to  them- 
selves; (a)  such  unclassified  students  are  ad- 
mitted to  take  at  one  time  not  more  than 
two  studies  in  the  regular  courses ;  and  they 
take  at  least  one  course  in  fulfilment  of  pre- 
requisites for  admission  as  a  classified  student; 
{b)  but  if,  in  addition  to  the  above  requirement, 
such  unclassified  students  show  that  they  have 
fulfilled  all  the  requirements  for  some  one  line 
of  work,  show  good  reason  for  not  taking  a 
regular  course,  and  also  receive  the  formal  rec- 
ommendation of  the  instructor  in  charge  of  the 
line  of  work  in  which  they  wish  to  specialize, 
they  may  be  permitted  to  specialize  in  one  line 
of  study. 

Section  9. —  Students  are  admitted  to  the  Med- 
ical Course  of  the  University  either  as  medical 
students,  as  undergraduate  students   and  candi- 


dates for  a  Bachelor's  degree,  or  as  graduate  stu- 
dents. 

1.  Admission  as  a  medical  student  is  granted 
on  the  following  conditions  :  (a)  presentation 
to  the  Dean  of  Medical  Students  of  a  certificate 
of  good  moral  character,  signed  by  at  least  two 
physicians  of  good  standing  in  the  state  in 
which  the  applicant  last  resided;  (^)  compli- 
ance with  the  requirements  for  admission  to  the 
Junior  Colleges  (see  sec.  2)  and,  in  addition 
thereto,  credits  for  twelve  Majors  of  work  in  an 
approved  college,  or  of  nine  Majors  of  work  in 
the  University  in  specified  branches.  Such  col- 
lege work  must  have  included  one  year  of 
college  Chemistry,  and  a  thorough  course  in 
Biology;  (c)  matriculation  and  registration  as  a 
student  of  Rush  Medical  College  as  well  as  of 
the   University  at  the  beginning  of  his  course. 

2.  Admission  as  an  undergraduate  student  is 
granted  on  the  following  conditions  :  {a)  com- 
pliance with  the  requirements  for  admission  or 
advanced  standing  in  the  Colleges;  {b)  presen- 
tation to  the  Dean  of  a  certificate  of  good  moral 
character  signed  by  at  least  two  physicians  in 
good  standing  in  the  state  in  which  the  appli- 
cant last  resided  ;  {c)  matriculation  and  registra- 
tion with  the  Dean  of  Rush  Medical  College  at 
the  beginning  of  his  work  in  medicine. 

3.  Graduate  students  are  admitted  to  the  med- 
ical course  under  conditions  prescribed  for  ad- 
mission as  medical  students. 

Section  10. —  Admission  to  the  College  of  Com- 
merce and  Administration  is  granted  on  the  same 
general  conditions  as  to  the  Colleges  of  Arts,  Lit- 
erature, and  Science  (see  sees.  2  and  3),  but  three 
Majors  of  College  Latin  are  accepted  in  satisfac- 
tion of  the  admission  requirements  in  Latin  3, 
4,  5- 

Section  11. —  Unclassified  students,  that  is,  un- 
dergraduate students  not  seeking  a  degree,  are 
admitted  to  courses  of  instruction  provided  that : 

I.  The    student    is   not  less    than    twenty-one 

years  of  age. 


22 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  VI 


2.  Sufficient  reason  is  given  for  not  entering  a 
regular  course. 

3.  Such  examinations  are  passed  as  are  satisfac- 
tory to  the  Dean  and  instructor  concerned. 

4.  The  student  is  not  permitted  to  talie  ele- 
mentary subjects  only. 

Section  12. —  Persons  of  mature  age  are  admit- 
ted as  honorary  students  to  the  courses  of  instruc- 
tion offered  in  the  University  by  permission  of 
the  President  on  payment  of  the  usual  fees  (see 
Art.  XIII,  sees.  5-9),  without  preliminary  exami- 
nations, and  without  responsibility  for  class 
exercises  or  examination.  Such  students  receive 
no  credit  on  the  Recorder's  books. 

Section  13. —  Students  are  granted  credit  for 
work  in  excess  of  the  admission  requirements  of 
the  College  or  School  to  which  they  are  admitted 
on  conditions  prescribed  below: 

1.  Any  advanced  standing  thus  assigned  is 
provisional  and  probationary  until  the  student 
has  shown  by  his  work  in  the  University  that 
he  is  entitled  to  the  place  assigned  him. 

2.  In  case  the  character  of  the  student's  work 
is  such  as  to  create  doubt  concerning  the  quality 
of  that  which  has  preceded,  the  University  ex- 
plicitly reserves  the  right  to  reconsider  the  as- 
signment of  advanced  standing,  and  to  exact 
an  examination  in  each  course  for  which  credit 
has  been  given. 

3.  An  official  statement  of  such  excess  credit 
is  furnished  authorizing  the  proper  depart- 
mental examiner  to  test  the  claim  by  examina- 
tion and  to  designate  the  amount  of  credit  to 
be  assigned. 

4.  Students  from  affiliated  and  co-operating 
schools,  who  present  acceptable  certificates  ag- 
gregating more  than  the  required  fifteen  units 
for  admission  to  the  University,  are  allowed  to 
gain  credit  in  advanced  standing  for  this  excess 
only  after  a  residence  of  two  Quarters  to  test 
their  general  scholarship,  and  after  the  regular 
examination  in  course  in  the  proposed  subjects. 

5.  Students  who  have  completed  at  least  one 


year's  work  in  a  college  or  university  of  high 
rank  and  are  honorably  dismissed  therefrom, 
receive  credit :  (a)  for  the  work  required  for 
admission  to  the  University ;  and  (b)  for  the 
college  work  already  done  in  so  far  as  it  is 
equivalent  to  courses  in  the  curriculum  of  the 
University,  provided  that  satisfactory  evidence 
is  furnished  that  this  work  has  been  done  in  a 
proper  manner. 

6.  The  official  record  of  a  student's  work  in  an 
institution  of  high  rank  will  be  satisfactory  evi- 
dence of  his  having  performed  that  work. 

7.  Except  in  the  case  of  students  from  affiliated 
colleges,  no  more  than  twenty-seven  Majors  of 
credit  are  given  for  undergraduate  work  done 
in  another  institution,  and,  with  the  same  ex- 
ception, a  Bachelor's  degree  is  not  conferred 
on  a  student  before  he  has  been  in  residence 
at  the  University  one  year  (three  Quarters),  and 
received  credit  for  nine  Majors  of  resident  work. 

8.  No  student  admitted  by  certificate  with  fif- 
teen units  is  allowed  at  a  later  time  to  substitute 
other  subjects  by  examination  with  a  view  to 
gaining  advanced  standing,  except  by  submit- 
ting a  satisfactory  certificate  of  instruction  in 
such  subjects. 

9.  Advanced  standing  for  preparatory  work  is 
given  only  in  subjects  taught  in  the  Junior  Col- 
leges, and  candidates  are  required  to  pass  the 
regular  course  examinations  in  such  subjects. 

10.  A  student  whose  high-school  course  has  ex- 
tended only  over  four  years,  without  extra  work 
in  the  school,  cannot  receive  advanced  stand- 
ing in  the  University. 

11.  Students  who  present  claims  for  advanced 
standing  specify  in  their  statement  at  the  outset 
all  the  work  for  which  they  expect  to  receive 
credit.  Credit  is  not  given  at  a  later  time  for 
work  not  thus  specified  unless  the  case  is  re- 
opened by  special  vote  of  the  Faculty. 

12.  The  applications  for  advanced  standing 
which  come  before  the  departmental  examiners 
for  decision,  are  subject  to  the  following  regu- 
lations : 


Article  VII 


THE  REGULATIONS 


23 


a.  The  candidate  receives  from  the  Dean  in 
the  Colleges  (in  charge  of  Advanced  Stand- 
ing) a  certificate  in  which  the  Dean  certifies 
to  the  Departmental  Examiner  that  docu- 
mentary evidence  of  the  completion  of  the 
work  for  [which  credit  is  desired  has  been 
offered  and  accepted. 

b.  On  the  same  blank  the  Departmental  Ex- 
aminer certifies  that  the  applicant  has  passed 
a  written  examination,  it  being  provided, 
however,  that  other  tests  may  be  applied  in 
the  laboratory  sciences. 

13.  For  advanced  standing  granted  to  candi- 
dates for  a  higher  degree  see  Art.  VIII,  sees. 
13  and  14. 

ARTICLE  VII.     REGISTRATION,   CLASSIFICATION, 
AND  SELECTION  OF  STUDIES. 

Section  i. — -Registration  includes  the  payment 
of  fees  to  the  Registrar,  the  selection  of  courses 
of  study,  after  consultation  with  the  proper  Dean, 
and  the  filing  of  the  registration  card. 

1.  The  Dean  advises  the  student  as  to  the  selec- 
tion of  courses  and  approves  by  his  signature 
the  student's  registration  card. 

2.  In  graduate  work,  the  student  consults  also 
with  the  Head  of  the  Department  in  which  his 
principal  work  is  done. 

3.  The  Registrar  issues  receipts  for  University 
bills  and  certifies  payment  upon  the  student's 
registration  card. 

Section  2. —  Students  register  quarterly  for  the 
courses  of  study  which  they  wish  to  pursue  during 
the  next  Quarter.  Candidates  for  degrees  register 
for  the  Quarter  in  which  the  final  examination 
for  the  degree  takes  place. 

Section  3. —  Registration  is  effected  as  follows: 

1.  Students  in  residence  register  for  the  fol- 
lowing Quarter  on  the  days  announced  on  the 
bulletin  boards  and  in  the  Weekly  Calendar. 

2.  Students  entering  the  University  for  the  first 
time,  or  resuming  work  after  an  absence  of 
more  than  a  Term,  register  on  or  before  the 
first  day  of  the  Quarter. 


Section  4. —  Undergraduate  students  are  sup- 
plied with  a  course-book  for  use  in  registration. 
The  following  regulations  apply  to  the  use  of  the 
course-book  : 

1.  It  is  presented  to  the  Dean  of  his  College 
at  the  time  of  registration. 

2.  It  is  left  with  the  Dean  during  the  third 
week  of  the  Quarter  by  all  students  in  resi- 
dence, for  the  purpose  of  posting. 

3.  It  is  not  marked  or  altered  in  any  way  by 
the  student.  In  all  cases  of  disagreement  the 
official  records  are  final. 

4.  It  is  used  for  recording  all  special  arrange- 
ments or  privileges  affecting  curriculum,  at- 
tendance, etc.  No  rulings  are  valid  unless 
entered  on  its  pages  by  the  Dean. 

5.  It  is  replaced  in  case  of  loss  on  application 
at  the  Dean's  office,  in  which  case  a  fee  of  50 
cents  is  paid  to  the  Registrar. 

6.  It  may  not  be  presented  to  other  institutions 
in  place  of  a  letter  of  dismissal  or  an  official 
record  of  credits. 

Sections. —  Registration  for  gymnasium  work 
follows  the  rule  prescribed  for  other  courses. 
Unless  excuse  cards  are  handed  in  each  Quarter, 
absences  count  against  the  student,  and  no  ex- 
cuse is  granted.  Women  register  for  Physical 
Culture  with  the  Dean  of  Women. 

Section  6. —  Undergraduates  may  be  registered 
for  Seminars,  provided  that :  (a)  they  are  recom- 
mended for  such  registration  by  the  instructor 
concerned  ;  {l))  they  are  in  the  last  year  of  their 
undergraduate  work ;  (<:)  no  credit  is  given  for 
the  course. 

Section  7. — A  resident  student,  or  one  who  has 
been  a  resident  in  the  University,  and  has  not 
taken  the  Bachelor's  degree,  may  register  for  cor- 
respondence work  only  with  the  approval  of  his 
Dean. 

Section  8. —  Registration  for  more  than  four 
Majors  of  work  in  one  Quarter  is  disapproved. 

Section  9. —  Advanced  courses  in  a  Depart- 
ment may  not  be  selected  before  the  preliminary 


24 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  VIII 


work  in  the  Department  has  been  completed. 
An  instructor,  with  the  approval  of  the  President, 
may  make  the  completion  of  the  studies  in  tribu- 
tary Departments  a  condition  in  the  selection  of 
courses. 

Section  lo. —  A  student  is  not  permitted  to  at- 
tend any  class  until  registration  for  the  same  is 
completed. 

Section  ii. —  If  registration  is  not  completed  at 
the  close  of  the  second  day  of  the  Quarter,  the 
consent  of  the  Dean  is  required,  and  a  fee  of  ^5 
is  paid. 

Section  12. — Registration  being  once  effected, 
change  of  Registration  is  permitted,  provided 
that  — 

1.  The  consent  of  the  Dean  is  obtained: 

2.  A  fee  of  $1  is  paid  to  the  Registrar:  {a)  un- 
less the  initiative  for  the  change  comes  from  a 
University  officer;  and  provided  that  {V)  the 
change  does  not  involve  an  addition  of  tuition 
fees  and  a  loss  of  credit. 

Section  13. —  Students  not  intending  to  be  in 
residence  during  a  Quarter  file  a  notice  to  that 
effect  in  lieu  of  registration. 

Section  14. —  Students  who  leave  before  the  end 
of  a  Quarter  (in  case  of  a  Major  or  Double  Major 
Course),  or  of  a  Term  (in  case  of  a  Minor  or  Double 
Minor  course),  receive  no  credit  for  any  course 
until  such  course  has  been  completed  through 
the  Correspondence  Department  of  the  Exten- 
sion Division.  An  instructor  is  not  at  liberty  to 
make  a  private  arrangement  with  the  student  to 
complete  such  work  and  to  receive  credit  there- 
for, and  the  Recorder  is  forbidden  to  record 
credit  except  on  the  basis  of  this  regulation :  {a) 
This  action  is  not  to  be  construed  as  forbidding 
the  giving  a  Minor's  (or  Double  Minor's)  credit 
for  one-half  of  a  Major  (or  Double  Major)  course, 
when  said  half  has  been  completed  in  residence. 
(U)  In  using  the  word  "incomplete"  (or  "  inc.") 
in  reporting  the  work  of  such  a  student,  instruct- 
ors   state   the    length   of    time   the  student    was 


present  and  the  character  of  his  work  for  that 
period,  (c)  For  permission  to  give  a  special  exami- 
nation, see  Art.  II,  sec.  14,  no.  10,  and  Art.  VIII, 
sec.  17,  no.  8.  In  such  cases  the  student  is 
charged  with  absences  accruing  after  dropping 
the  work. 

Section  15. — Students  in  the  Colleges  are 
classed  in  Divisions  according  to  the  number  of 
Majors  of  credit  on  the  University  records. 

1.  The  students  of  the  Junior  Colleges  are 
classed  in  six  Divisions.  The  sixth  Division  in- 
cludes students  with  less  than  3  Majors  of 
credit;  the  fifth,  those  with  3,  but  less  than  6; 
the  fourth,  those  with  6,  but  less  than  9  ;  the 
third,  those  with  9,  but  less  than  12;  the 
second,  those  with  12,  but  less  than  15;  the 
first,  those  with  15  or  more.  Divisions  VI,  V, 
and  IV  form  the  lower  Juniors ;  Divisions  III, 
II,  and  I,  form  the  Upper  Juniors. 

2.  The  students  of  the  Senior  Colleges  are  like- 
wise classed  in  six  Divisions.  The  sixth  Division 
includes  students  in  the  Senior  Colleges  with 
a  total  credit  (including  Junior  College  credits) 
of  less  than  21  Majors;  the  fifth,  those  with 
21,  but  less  than  24  ;  the  fourth,  those  with  24, 
but  less  than  27  ;  the  third,  those  with  27,  but 
less  than  30;  the  second,  those  with  30,  but 
less  than  t^2>  \  '^^  first,  those  with  33  or  more. 
Divisions  VI,  V,  and  IV  constitute  the  Lower 
Seniors ;  Divisions  III,  II,  and  I  constitute 
the  Upper  Seniors. 

3.  Each  Division  has  a  member  of  the  Faculty 
as  Division  Officer. 

4.  The  students  in  each  Division  except  the 
Junior  sixth  hold  an  official  meeting  on  the 
first  day  of  each  Quarter,  at  which  the  Division 
Officer  is  present.  Absence  from  this  meeting 
is  equivalent  to  ab.sence  from  ten  class  exer- 
cises. 

ARTICLE  VIII.     INSTRUCTION. 

Section  i. —  Courses  of  instruction  provided  by 
the  University  are  organized  under  the  following 
Departments  : 


Atticl    VIII 


THE  REGULATIONS 


25 


The  Schools  and  Colleges  of  Arts,  Litera- 
ture, AND  Science. 


I. 

Philosophy. 

11. 

Political  Economy. 

111. 

Political  Science. 

IV. 

History. 

V. 

The  History  of  Art. 

VI. 

Sociology  and  Anthropology. 

VII. 

Comparative  Religion. 

VIII. 

Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures. 

IX. 

Biblical  and  Patristic  Greek. 

X. 

Sanskrit  and  Indo-European  Comparative 

Philology. 

XI. 

The  Greek  Language  and  Literature. 

XII. 

The  Latin  Language  and  Literature. 

XIII. 

The  Romance  Languages  and  Literatures. 

XIV. 

The  Germanic  Languages  and  Literatures. 

XV. 

The    English    Language    and    Literature, 

and  Rhetoric. 

XVI. 

Literature  (in  English). 

XVII. 

Mathematics. 

XVIIl. 

Astronomy  and  Astrophysics. 

XIX. 

Physics. 

XX. 

Chemistry. 

XXI. 

Geology. 

XXI  .,4.  Geography. 

XXII. 

Zoology. 

XXIII. 

Anatomy. 

XXIV. 

Physiology  (including  Physiological  Chem- 

istry and  Pharmacology). 

XXV. 

Neurology. 

XXVI. 

Palasontology. 

XXVII. 

Botany. 

XXVIll. 

Pathology  and  Bacteriology. 

XXXI. 

Public  Speaking. 

XXXIl. 

Physical  Culture  and  Athletics. 

XXXIII. 

Military  Science  and  Tactics. 

2.  The  Divinity  School. 

a)    The  Graduate  Divinity  School : 

XLI.    Old  Testament  Literature  and  Interpreta- 
tion. 
XLll.    New  Testament  Literature  and  Interpreta- 
tion. 
XLIII.    Biblical  Theology. 
XLIV.    Systematic  Theology. 

XLV.    Church  History. 
XLVl.    Homiletics,   Church   Polity,  and   Pastoral 
Duties. 

^)    The  Dano-Norivesian  Theological  Seminary  : 

L.    Old  and    New   Testament  Literature  and 

Interpretation. 
LI.    Systematic  Theology. 
LII.    Homiletics,   Church    Polity,  and   Pastoral 
Duties. 
Llll.    Church  History. 

c)    The  Swedish  Theological  Seminary  : 

LV.    Old  and  New  Testament    Literature  and 

Interpretation. 
LVI.    Systematic  Theology. 
LVII.    Church  History. 
LVIII.    Homiletics,   Church    Polity,  and   Pastoral 
Duties. 


d)   Allied  Organizations  : 

LXl.    The  Disciples'  Divinity  House. 
LXII.    The    Cumberland    Presbyterian    Divinity 
House. 

3.  In  the  Law  School  courses  are  offered  in 
the  Departments  of  Common  Law,  Equity, 
Commercial  Law,  Public  Law,  and  Remedial 
Law. 

4.  In  the  School  of  Education  instruction  is 
organized  in  the  following  courses : 


I.   GENERAL   COURSE. 

Philosophy  and  Education 

History,  English,  and  Oral  Reading  - 

Arts 

Mathematics      ----- 
Science,  including  Geography 
Electives 


II.  arts  and  technology. 
Educational  Theory  and  Practice  - 
Special  Art        .         -         .         .         . 
Electives        -         .         -         .         - 


3  Mjs. 
3  Mjs. 

2  Mjs. 
I  Mj. 

3  Mjs. 
6  Mjs. 


5  Mjs. 
7  Mjs. 

6  Mjs. 


III.    preparatory  to  teaching  in 
secondary  schools. 

a.  These  courses  require  a  certain  amount 
of  work  in  educational  theory  after  the  com- 
pletion of  the  Junior  College  work.  The 
amount  varies  from  four  to  five  Majors  in 
different  courses. 

b.  They  require  completion  of  a  certain 
amount  of  work  in  the  particular  subject 
which  the  person  intends  to  teach  in  a  sec- 
ondary school.  This  varies  from  six  to  eight 
Majors  in  the  different  subjects. 

c.  The  remainder  of  the  courses  are  elective. 

Section  2. — Courses  of  instruction  are  classified 
as  Majors  and  Minors,  and  call  for  a  specific 
number  of  hours  per  week,  or  the  equivalent  of 
the  same,  as  follows:  The  Major  course  occupies 
four  or  five  hours  weekly  for  a  Quarter  (twelve 
weeks).  The  Minor  course  occupies  four  or  five 
hours  weekly  for  a  Term  (six  weeks).  The  Double 
Major    or    Double    Minor    occupies    double    the 


26 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  VIII 


•weekly   time  for  the    Quarter   or    Term   respect- 
ively. 

1.  Major  and  Minor  courses  in  the  Junior  Col- 
leges uniformly  occupy  five  hours  weekly. 

2.  In  the  Summer  Quarter  courses  in  all  the 
Schools  and  Colleges  occupy  five  hours  weekly. 

3.  Seminar  work  is  estimated  in  Majors  or 
Minors  not  according  to  the  number  of  hours 
occupied  weekly,  but  according  to  the  character 
of  the  work  required.  Determination  of  the 
credit  value  of  the  Seminar  lies  within  the  prov- 
ince of  the  instructor,  subject  to  the  approval 
of  the  Head  of  the  Department. 

Section  3. — The  normal  work  of  the  student  is 
three  courses  for  each  Quarter. 

1.  The  student  is  permitted  to  take  two  Majors 
or  their  equivalent,  or  one  Major,  provided 
that  he  furnishes  satisfactory  evidence  to  his 
Dean  that  he  is  making  the  proper  use  of  his 
time. 

2.  A  student  may  take  four  Majors  of  work 
during  a  Quarter.  In  the  case  of  an  under- 
graduate student  this  is  permitted  only  on 
approval  of  his  recent  instructors  and  the  pay- 
ment of  an  additional  fee  (see  Art.  XIII,  sec. 
7,  no.  8).     Medical  students  paying  full  medical 


tuition  may  be  permitted  by  the  Dean  of  Medi- 
cal students  to  take  3^  Majors  without  extra 
fee.  This  permission  is  not  granted  to  a 
Divinity  student  who  is  in  charge  of  a  church. 
Women  desiring  to  take  four  Majors  secure 
the  permission  of  the  Dean  of  Women. 

3.  A  student  in  the  Divinity  School,  acting  as 
pastor  of  a  church,  may  not,  after  his  first  year, 
take  more  than  two  Majors  during  the  Quarter, 
or  their  equivalent,  except  by  special  vote  of 
the  Faculty  of  the  Divinity  School. 

4.  Students  whose  standing  in  two-thirds  of 
their  work  for  any  Quarter  is  "D"  or  "E"  (see 
sec.  20)  are  not  permitted  to  select  during  the 
next  Quarter  more  than  two  Majors. 

5.  A  student  is  not  permitted  to  study  in  the 
University  four  consecutive  Quarters  without  a 
physician's  certificate  that  he  may  do  the  work  of 
the  fourth  Quarter  without  injury  to  his  health. 

6.  For  other  limitations  in  the  number  of 
courses  selected  see  Art.  VI,  sec.  2,  no.  6,  and 
Art.  VII,  sec.  8. 

Section  4. — The  student  is  expected  to  complete 
during  the  six  years  of  preparatory  and  Junior 
College  work  combined  one  of  the  following 
curricula: 


Subjects. 

College  of  Arts. 

College  of  Litera- 
ture. 

College  of  Science. 

College  of  Commerce 
AND  Administration. 

Admis- 
sion. 

College. 

Total. 

Admis- 
sion. 

College. 

Total. 

Admission. 

College. 

Total. 

Admis- 
sion. 

College. 

Total. 

Political  Economy.. 
Political  Science..  . . 

2 

6 

8 
2 

4 
6 
2 

3 
3 

3 

2 
2 
2 

3 

2 

9 
II 

5 
6 
8 

4 
3 

4 

8 
6 

4 
6 
2 

2 

3 
3 
3 
2 
2 
3 

6 

II 
9 
7 
8 

4 
3 

2 

'8  (or  4)* 
6 

4 
6 
4  (or  8) 

0  (or  3)* 

3 

3 

3 

6 

3  (or  0) 

2 

8  (or  7) 
9 
7 
9 
10  (or  14) 
3  (or  0) 

4 

8 
6 
4 
6 
2 

2 

I 

3 
I 

3 
3 
2 
2 

I 

2 

I 

7 
I 

Sociology 

Greek 

Latin 

8 

French  or  German .  . 
English 

9 

7 
8 

4 
I 

Mathematics 

Science 

Total 

30 

18 

48 

30 

18 

48 

30 

18 

48 

30 

18 

48 

*F'or  the  last  four  Majors  (=  2  units)  of  admission  Latin  the  student  may  substitute  four  Majors  (=  2  units)  from  the 
following  group  :,  Greek  i),  2);  History  3a),  3^),  4*^),  5(5);  German  3),  a  unit;  French  3),  a  unit.  In  case  entrance  units  other 
than  those  specified  are  offered   instead  of  the  four  Majors  of  Latin,  three  Majors  of  Latin  will  be  required  in  College. 


Article  VIII 


THE  REGULATIONS 


27 


If  the  student  offered  for  admission  substitutes 
for  some  of  the  recommended  subjects,  the  latter 
are  taken  in  the  Colleges,  thus  diminishing  College 
electives  (see  Art.  VI,  sec.  2,  no.  5). 

Section  5. — The  student  in  the  Junior  Colleges 
completes  eighteen  Majors  of  work  in  one  of  the 
following  curricula : 


Arts  (A.B 

.). 

Science  (S.B.). 

Majors. 

Majors. 

Greek  (2, 3,  and  4)     • 

-      3 

French  and  German  -         •     3 

Latin  (4,  5,  and  6) 

3 

English  (i,  3,  and  40)     -          3 

French  or  German 

-      3 

Mathematics  (i,  2,  and  3  or  4)  3 

English  (i  and  3)  - 

2 

Science       -         -         -         -     6 

Mathematics  (i  and  2) 

2 

Elective          -         -         -          3 

Science 

2 

Public  Speaking          -         -     2  Qrs. 

Elective     - 

-       3 

Physical  Culture    -         -          6  Qrs. 

Public  Speaking     - 

2  Qrs. 
-       6  Qrs. 

Physical  Culture 

COMMEFCE  AND   ADMINISTRATION. 

(Ph.B.  [Com.  and  Adm.]). 

Literature  (Ph.B. 

[Lit.J). 

Political  Economy  (3  and  44)  2 
Political  Science  (1)            -     i 

History 

2 

History  (i,  2,  and  3)     -          3 

Latin  {4,  5,  and  6) 

3 

Sociology  (71  )  -          -         -     I 

French  or  German 

3 

Modern  Languages         •          3 

English  (i,  3,  and  40) 

3 

English  ( I,  3,  and  40)         -     3 

Mathematics  (i  and  2) 

2 

Mathematics          -         -         2 

Science 

2 

Science       -         ...     2 

Elective     • 

-       3 

Elective          -         -         -          i 

Public  Speaking     - 

2  Qrs. 

Public  Speaking         -         -     2  Qrs. 

Physical  Culture 

-       6  Qrs. 

Physical  Culture    -         •          6  Qrs_ 

1.  Students  in  the  Junior  Colleges  take  Public 
Speaking  two  hours  a  week  during  two  con- 
secutive Quarters  after  the  completion  of  the 
first  required  Major  in  Rhetoric,  and  Physical 
Culture  for  four  half-hours  a  week  during  six 
Quarters.  Military  Science  is  accepted  in  lieu 
of  the  requirement  of  Physical  Culture.  The 
requirement  for  Physical  Culture  is  propor- 
tionately reduced  for  students  entering  with 
advanced  standing. 

2.  The  regulations  governing  the  work  in 
Military  Science  and  Tactics  are  as  follows  : 

a.  The  work  is  recognized  as  a  separate  and 
independent  Department,  under  the  direc- 
tion of  the  Board  of  Physical  Culture  and 
Athletics. 

b.  No  work  in  Physical  Culture  is  a  pre- 
requisite for  enlistment. 

c.  There  are  at  least  three  weekly  exercises. 

d.  The  rules  governing  the  organization, 
membership,    and    work    of    Military    Com- 


panies are  as  follows  :  (i)  Each  company  is 
organized  as  a  club,  with  a  minimum  of 
forty  members.  (2)  It  has  its  own  civil  or- 
ganization, electing  civil  officers  and  mem- 
bers, subject  to  approval  by  the  University. 
(3)  The  number  of  members  in  a  company  is 
limited  to  one  hundred.  (4)  Membership  is 
continued  to  the  end  of  the  tenth  Quarter 
of  residence  at  the  University,  unless  per- 
mission to  withdraw  is  obtained  from  the 
Board  of  Physical  Culture. 
e.  Election  takes  place  at  the  end  of  the  first 
six  weeks  of  the  Quarter,  and  persons  thus 
elected  register  with  their  Deans  once  for  all. 

3.  Each  Division  in  the  Junior  Colleges  has, 
in  addition  to  the  work  prescribed  in  the  curric- 
ulum, a  series  of  weekly  Division  lectures  each 
Quarter,  at  which  attendance  is  required. 

4.  Candidates  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of 
Philosophy  or  Bachelor  of  Science  who  enter 
without  French  or  German,  take  at  least  three 
Majors  of  the  omitted  language  in  the  Junior 
Colleges. 

5.  Candidates  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of 
Science  who  offered  but  two  units  of  Latin  at 
entrance,  are  required  to  complete  three  Majors 
of  Latin  in  the  Junior  Colleges  ;  unless  the  sub- 
stitutes specified  in  section  4  above  are  offered. 

6.  Two  Majors  are  required  of  students  in  the 
College  of  Science  in  each  of  the  following 
subjects  in  which  a  unit  of  credit  was  not  given 
on  admission  :  (a)  Chemistry;  {f)  Physiography 
and  Geology;  (c)  Zoology  and  Botany.  The 
requirement  of  six  Majors  is  never  reduced  by 
excess  in  admission  credits. 

7.  If  electives  in  the  College  of  Science  have 
been  displaced  in  consequence  of  unfulfilled 
entrance  requirements  in  subjects  other  than 
science,  the  student  may  recover  such  electives, 
if  he  wishes  to  use  them  for  Science  or  Mathe- 
matics, to  an  extent  not  exceeding  one  Major 
for  each  half-unit  by  which  the  amount  of 
science  offered  for  entrance  may  fall  short  of 
three  and  one-half  units. 


28 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  VIII 


8.  In  satisfaction  of  Science  requirements, 
courses  from  Departments  XVII-XXVIII  must 
be  taken. 

Section  6. — When  a  student  has  admission  credit 
of  seven  or  more  units  on  the  Recorder's  books, 
and  enough  College  credits  (reckoning  two  Majors 
for  one  unit)  to  bring  the  number  of  combined 
units  up  to  thirteen,  he  may  be  classified  as  a 
member  of  the  Junior  Colleges. 

Section  7. —  Students  who  have  been  enrolled  in 
another  college  on  the  approved  list,  and  have 
entered  with  full  credit  for  entrance  work  and 
with  nine  Majors  of  college  credit,  are  required  to 
complete  the  curriculum  of  the  Junior  Colleges, 
except  when  this  involves  more  than  nine  Majors 
of  requirements.  Requirements  in  excess  of  nine 
Majors  are  canceled,  the  Majors  canceled  to  be 
selected  in  accordance  with  the  principles  laid 
down  in  the  case  of  students  entering  the  Senior 
Colleges  with  advanced  standing  (see  sec.  10).  In 
the  case  of  students  from  colleges  not  on  the 
approved  list,  the  amount  of  substitution  per- 
mitted is  limited  to  two  Majors,  it  being  under- 
stood that  not  more  than  one  Major  may  be 
taken  in  any  one  subject. 

Section  8. — The  amount  of  work  regularly  re- 
quired in  any  Senior  College  is  eighteen  Majors. 

1.  Four  half-hours  of  Physical  Culture  weekly 
during  four  Quarters  are  required  in  the  Senior 
Colleges.  The  two  Quarters  to  be  omitted  are 
arranged  with  the  Department  of  Physical  Cul- 
ture. 

2.  Students  who  are  deficient  in  the  work  in 
Public  Speaking  required  in  the  Junior  Colleges 
may  be  admitted  to  the  Senior  Colleges,  pro- 
vided such  deficiency  was  caused  by  circum- 
stances beyond  the  students'  control.  This 
deficiency  becomes  a  condition  to  be  removed 
before  graduation. 

3.  Attendance  on  the  weekly  Division  lecture 
is  required  (see  sec.  5,  no.  3). 

4.  The  Bachelor's  degree  is  granted  to  students 
who  fulfil  the  following  conditions:  {a)  at  least 


eight  Quarters  of  resident  work  in  the  Univer- 
sity of  Chicago;  (b)  at  least  twenty-four  Majors 
of  residence  credits;  (/)  an  attainment  of  thirty- 
three  Majors'  credit  with  an  average  grade  of 
B  +  +.  This  privilege  does  not  lessen  specific 
requirements  or  any  other  of  the  ordinary  re- 
quirements for  graduation. 

Section  9. — The  courses  open  to  members  of 
the  Senior  Colleges  are  elective  on  the  following 
conditions: 

1.  A  student  in  the  Colleges  of  Arts,  Litera- 
ture, and  Science  may  not  elect  more  than 
nine  Majors  from  any  one  Department. 

2.  Candidates  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of 
Arts  (A.B.)  select  at  least  one-third  of  their 
work  from  Departments  numbered  I  to  XVII 
(see  sec.  i,  no.  i). 

3.  Candidates  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of 
Philosophy  (Ph.B.)  in  the  College  of  Literature 
select  at  least  one-third  of  their  work  in  De- 
partments numbered  I  to  VI  and  XII  to  XVII 
(see  sec.  i,  no.  i). 

4.  Candidates  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of 
Science  (S.B.)  select  one-third  of  their  work 
from  one  or  more  of  the  Departments  num- 
bered XVII  to  XXVIII  (see  sec.  i,  no.  i). 

5.  In  the  interpretation  of  these  regulations 
courses  in  two  or  more  subdivisions  of  one  of 
the  recognized  twenty-nine  Departments  are 
considered  as  courses  falling  within  a  single 
Department. 

6.  Candidates  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of 
Philosophy  in  the  College  of  Commerce  and 
Administration  elect  one  of  four  groups  into 
which  the  work  is  divided.  These  groups  are 
{a)  Banking,  (b)  Transportation,  (c)  Trade  and 
Industry,  and  (</)  Journalism. 

7.  Two  Majors  in  Philosophy  and  two  Majors 
in  History  are  required  for  graduation  from 
the  Colleges  of  Arts,  Literature,  and  Science. 

8.  Courses  in  the  Divinity  School  approved  by 
the  cognate  Departments  represented  in  the 
Colleges,  and  other  Divinity  courses  approved 


Article  VIII 


THE  REG  ULA  TIONS 


29 


by  the  Faculty  of  the  Senior  Colleges,  may  be 
elected  by  students  in  the  Senior  Colleges. 

Section  10. —  Substitutions  are  allowed  in   the 
work  of  the  Colleges  as  follows : 

1.  The  regulations  governing  substitutions  are 
interpreted  as  applicable  either  to  admission 
requirements  or  to  College  requirements,  but 
not  to  both. 

2.  A  student  is  not  allowed  to  make  substitu- 
tion under  more  than  one  rule  of  the  Faculties. 

3.  Students  entering  the  University  with  ad- 
vanced credit  are  allowed  to  substitute  college 
work  for  any  specific  work,  except  English,  re- 
quired for  the  Bachelor's  degree  at  the  Univer- 
sity, as  follows: 

a.  Students  entering  with  twenty-seven  Ma- 
jors of  college  credits  are  allowed  six 
Majors  of  substitution. 

b.  Students  having  eighteen  Majors  of  col- 
lege credits  are  allowed  four  Majors  of  sub- 
stitution. 

c.  All  regularly  classified  students,  entering 
with  credit  for  two  or  more  full  years'  work 
in  an  approved  college,  are  excused  from  all 
required  work  in  the  Junior  Colleges  when 
they  enter  the  University. 

d.  The  work  accepted  is  to  compare  in 
quantity  and  grade,  but  not  necessarily  in 
kind,  with  that  displaced.  Not  more  than 
three  Majors  in  any  one  subject  are  to  be 
offered  in  substitution,  or  to  be  displaced  by 
such  substitution. 

The  word  "subject  "  is  interpreted  as  :  (i) 
Latin  and  Greek,  one  subject.  Only  one  Ma- 
jor in  each  may  be  canceled  in  the  case  of  can- 
didates for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts.  (2) 
French  and  German,  one  subject.  Only  one 
Major  in  each  may  be  canceled  in  the  case 
of  candidates  for  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of 
Philosophy,  whose  work  lies  chiefly  in  lan- 
guage and  literature.  Candidates  for  the 
degree  of  Bachelor  of  Philosophy,  whose 
work  in   the   University   lies  chiefly  in  law. 


may  be  allowed  three  Majors'  substitution  in' 
this  subject,  i.  e.,  the  same  privilege  which  is 
granted  candidates  for  the  degree  of  Bach- 
elor of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  with  ref- 
erence to  French  and  German.  (3)  History 
and  Philosophy,  one  subject.  Only  one 
Major  in  each  may  be  canceled,  except  that  in 
the  case  of  students  entering  the  Law  School, 
three  Majors  of  substitution  are  allowed.  (4) 
Mathematics  and  Science,  one  subject.  Only 
one  Major  in  each  may  be  canceled  in  the 
case  of  candidates  for  the  degree  of  Bach- 
elor of  Science,  except  that  such  students 
entering  the  Medical  Course  may  substitute 
Science  for  Mathematics.   (See  no.  4  a  below.) 

4.  Students  in  the  Medical  Course  are  allowed 
the  following  special  substitutions  : 

a.  Students  in  the  Colleges  of  Arts  and  Lit- 
erature may  substitute  Science  for  the  second 
Major  of  Philosophy  or  History  and  may  take, 
when  necessary,  four  Majors  of  work  instead 
of  six  Majors  in  the  Departments  I  to  XVII 
(A.B.),  or  I  to  VI,  and  XII  to  XVII  (Ph.B.). 

b.  Such  students  in  the  College  of  Science 
may  substitute  Science  for  the  second  Major 
of  Philosophy  or  for  a  Major  of  History. 

c.  Such  students  are  allowed  to  substitute 
Physics  or  Chemistry  for  the  second  Major 
of  Geology  and  for  the  third  Major  of  re- 
quired Mathematics. 

d.  Such  students  entering  with  eighteen  or 
more  Majors  of  credit  may  substitute  as  under 
3  above. 

e.  In  case  such  students  abandon  the  Medi- 
cal Course,  their  curricula  revert  at  once  to 
the  original  requirements. 

5.  Students  of  the  University,  in  absentia,  at- 
tending affiliated  schools,  receive  the  credit  for 
Physical  Culture  which  would  be  given  for  ad- 
vanced standing  in  other  work. 

Section  11. —  Unclassified  students  are  subject 
to  all  the  usual  regulations  of  the  University  per- 
taining to  undergraduate  students,  including  Di- 


30 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  VIII 


vision  meetings  and  lectures,  Chapel  assembly, 
and  Physical  Culture,  unless  more  than  one-half 
of  their  work  is  in  the  Senior  Colleges  or  in  the 
Graduate  Schools. 

Section  12. —  The  student  in  University  College 
completes  the  work  of  the  Junior  and  the  Senior 
Colleges  as  outlined  above  (sees.  4-8);  or  he  may 
complete  the  following  work  leading  to  the  de- 
gree of  Bachelor  of  Philosophy:  {a)  The  Majors 
of  prescribed  college  work  common  to  all  other 
courses,  viz.:  English,  2  Majors  ;  Mathematics,  2 
Majors  ;  Science,  2  Majors  ;  French  or  German, 
3  Majors  ;  Philosophy,  2  Majors  ;  Latin,  3  Ma- 
jors. (J))  A  sufficient  number  of  elective  Majors 
from  among  the  courses  offered  by  the  University, 
either  in  University  College  or  the  other  Colleges, 
to  complete,  with  the  prescribed  Majors,  the  full 
number  of  thirty-six  Majors  required  for  gradua- 
tion, provided  that  at  least  three  of  these  are 
chosen  in  the  courses  in  Education  in  the  De- 
partment of  Philosophy. 

1.  All  students  who  are  candidates  for  degrees 
take,  either  in  the  preparatory  or  college 
courses,  at  least  seven  Majors  of  Latin. 

2.  A  student  who  does  not  offer  Latin  for  ad- 
mission, but  presents  a  sufficient  number  of 
units  in  other  subjects  to  make  up  the  fifteen 
units  required  for  admission,  may  take  the  re- 
quired Latin  in  University  College.  This  may 
be  counted  as  college  work. 

3.  No  candidate  may  offer  in  the  Senior  Col- 
leges more  than  nine  Majors  from  any  one 
Department. 

4.  Two  Majors  of  History  are  required  of  all 
candidates  for  the  Bachelor's  degree,  unless 
General  European  History  was  presented  as 
one  of  the  subjects  for  admission. 

5.  A  student  may  be  classed  as  a  Senior  Col- 
lege student  on  receiving  credit  for  eighteen 
Majors  of  college  work,  provided  that  the  pre- 
scribed courses  indicated  above,  except  Philos- 
ophy, are  included  in  the  eighteen  Majors  of- 
fered for  such  credit. 


Section  13. — The  courses  of  instruction  in  the 
Graduate  Schools  are  elective,  except  as  the  elec- 
tion is  modified  by  the  previous  choice  involved  in 
candidacy  for  a  particular  degree.  (See  Art.  XI, 
sees.  4,  6,  8.) 

1.  Graduate  work  done  in  another  institution 
is  accepted  as  resident  work  in  the  University, 
provided  that  : 

a.  The  institution  in  which  the  work  is  done 
is  of  high  standing  ;  and 

b.  Sufficient  evidence  is  furnished  that  the 
particular  work  is  satisfactorily  performed. 

c.  No  work  done  in  another  institution  is  ac- 
cepted in  lieu  of  the  minimum  of  one  year  of 
residence  required  for  any  degree. 

2.  Non-resident  work  may  be  substituted  for 
resident  work  for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of 
Philosophy  under  the  following  conditions  : 

a.  The  non-resident  student  is  expected  to 
matriculate  at  the  University  and  spend  the 
first  year  of  the  time  required  for  the  degree 
in  residence,  unless  he  satisfies  the  Head  of 
the  Department  concerned  that  he  can  do 
the  introductory  work  in  a  satisfactory  man- 
ner though  not  in  attendance. 

b.  The  non-resident  work  is  performed 
under  the  general  direction  of  the  Head  of 
the  Department  concerned. 

c.  The  final  examination  in  all  work  leading 
to  a  degree  is  passed  at  the  University. 

3.  No  non-resident  work  is  accepted  in  lieu  of 
the  minimum  residence  of  one  year  required 
for  the  Master's  degree. 

Section  14. —  Courses  of  instruction  in  the 
Graduate  Divinity  School  are  partly  required  and 
partly  elective. 

I.  The  student  completes  twelve  preliminary 
Majors  of  required  work,  as  follows: 

Old  Testament  (80,  81,  82;  for  one  of  which  84  may  be 

substituted),  3  Majors. 
New  Testament  (i,  10,  15),  3  Majors. 
Systematic  Theology    (24,  26,  and   either   i   or  9),  3 

Majors. 
Church  History  (i,  3,  and  either  4  or  18),  3  Majors. 


Article  VIII 


THE  REGULATIONS 


31 


2.  In  addition  to  these  twelve  courses  each  stu- 
dent is  required  to  take  during  his  first  year  of 
residence  : 

a.  Work  in  English  under  the  direction  of 
the  Department  of  Homiletics,  one  hour  a 
week  during  the  Autumn  Quarter. 

b.  Work  in  Music,  one  hour  a  week  during 
the  Winter  and  Spring  Quarters. 

3.  On  completion  of  at  least  nine  of  the  twelve 
preliminary  Majors,  provided  only  that  they  have 
been  taken  in  five  Departments,  the  student — 

a.  Submits  to  the  Faculty  of  the  Divinity 
School  for  approval  a  written  statement  indi- 
cating :  (i)  His  selection  of  one  of  the  fol- 
lowing fields  of  future  work  :  {a)  preaching  ; 
ip)  religious  teaching  ;  {c)  pastoral  work ;  {d) 
administrative  work  ;  {e)  editorial  work  ;  (/) 
missionary  work.  (2)  One  of  the  following 
Departments,  as  that  of  his  principal  sub- 
ject :  ia)  Old  Testament ;  {b^  New  Testa- 
ment ;  (^)  Church  History ;  (^)  Systematic 
Theology ;  (^)  Sociology ;  (/)  Homiletics. 
(3)  A  professor  in  the  Department  in  which 
he  has  chosen  his  principal  subject,  as  his 
adviser,  under  whose  direction  he  does  his 
subsequent  work.  (4)  Which  of  the  follow- 
ing degrees  he  is  seeking  :  (a)  Bachelor  of 
Divinity  ;  (b)  Master  of  Arts  ;  (c)  Doctor  of 
Philosophy.  But  the  candidate  for  the  de- 
gree of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  must  select  his 
principal  subject  in  one  of  the  first  five  De- 
partments named  above  (2). 

b.  Takes  three  Majors  of  Homiletics,  if  he 
chooses  preaching,  or  pastoral,  or  missionary 
work  as  his  field  of  future  labor. 

c.  Takes  three  pedagogical  courses  (Majors),  if 
he  chooses  teaching  as  his  field  of  future  labor. 

d.  Takes  Hebrew,  if  he  chooses  the  Old  Tes- 
tament or  the  New  Testament  as  his  princi- 
pal subject  for  the  Doctor's  degree. 

e.  With  the  approval  of  the  Department 
under  whose  guidance  he  is  doing  his  work 
he  may  pursue  studies  either  in  the  Divinity 
School  or  in  the  Graduate  Schools. 


f.  Completes  a  certain  specified  number  of 
Majors,  if  a  candidate  for  a  special  degree 
(for  the  specifications  see  Art.  XI,  sec.  8, 
nos.  4-7). 

4.  The  student  may  substitute  non-resident 
for  resident  work,  provided  that  : 

a.  The  non-resident  work  is  performed 
under  the  direction  of  a  Professor  or  Instruc- 
tor in  the  University  Extension  Division,  and 
is  a  full  equivalent  in  amount  and  character 
for  that  for  which  it  is  substituted. 

b.  A  satisfactory  examination  is  passed  upon 
the  same  at  the  University. 

c.  Not  more  than  nine  Majors  of  non-resi- 
dent work  may  be  offered  for  any  degree. 

5.  Senior  College  students  who  have  com- 
pleted nine  Majors  of  Senior  College  work  are 
permitted  to  elect  the  nine  remaining  Majors 
in  the  Graduate  Divinity  School,  and  the  Ma- 
jors so  elected  are  credited  toward  the  degree 
of  Bachelor  of  Divinity. 

6.  Students  intending  to  become  medical  mis- 
sionaries are  permitted  to  take  a  special  course 
upon  certain  conditions. 

7.  Students  coming  from  other  theological 
schools  of  high  grade  receive  credit  for  work 
already  done. 

Section  15. —  Courses  of  Instruction  in  the  Eng- 
lish Theological  Seminary  are  offered  to  resident 
and  non-resident  students. 

1.  Resident  courses  are  offered  in  the  Summer 
Quarter  and  consist  of  two  or  more  groups, 
each  of  three  Majors. 

2.  Non-resident  courses  are  offered  by  corre- 
spondence during  the  Autumn,  Winter,  and 
Spring  Quarters.  Twenty-four  Majors  com- 
plete the  work  of  the  Seminary,  of  which  six 
may  be  taken  in  subjects  preparatory  to  the 
theological  curriculum,  viz.  :  Rhetoric,  Logic, 
Psychology,  History,  Evidences  of  Christian- 
ity, and  Ethics. 

Section  16. — A  student  doing  work  in  the  Uni- 
versity is  permitted  at  the  same  time  to  do  work 


32 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHIC  A  GO 


Article  VIII 


elsewhere  than  at  the  school  or  college  in 
which  he  is  registered,  on  the  following  condi- 
tions : 

1.  Work  may  be  done  in  other  institutions, 
provided  that  the  formal  approval  of  the  proper 
Dean  is  obtained.  This  procedure  involves 
{a)  a  formal  record  with  the  Dean  of  the  out- 
side work  desired;  (p)  consultation  with  in- 
structors with  whom  the  student  is  working ; 
{c)  the  Dean's  approval;  id')  the  Dean's  report 
to  the  Faculty. 

2.  Courses  in  Colleges  of  the  University  other 
than  that  in  which  the  student  is  registered  may 
be  taken,  provided  that  the  consent  of  the 
proper  Dean  is  obtained. 

Section  17. — At  the  close  of  each  course  of  study 
an  examination  is  held  by  the  instructor,  the  par- 
ticular time  being  officially  announced  in  the 
Weekly  Calendar. 

1.  Quarterly  examinations  are  given  in  gradu- 
ate courses  at  the  discretion  of  the  instructor.  * 

2.  If  quarterly  examinations  are  not  given  in 
graduate  courses,  instruction  continues  to  be 
given  until  the  last  day  of  the  Quarter. 

3.  Students  in  the  Junior  Colleges  credited  with 
fourteen  or  more  Majors,  and  students  in  the 
Senior  Colleges  credited  with  thirty-two  or  more 
Majors,  are  excused  in  the  final  Quarter  of 
their  residence  from  the  regular  quarterly  ex- 
aminations, provided  that  the  instructors  con- 
cerned so  recommend.  But  in  all  cases  these 
students  are  expected  to  attend  all  the  exercises 
of  the  course  through  the  week  preceding  Con- 
vocation. 

4.  The  privilege  of  exemption  from  the  final 
examinations  is  extended  in  the  Junior  Col- 
leges only  to  those  students  who  are  to  receive 
a  diploma  with  less  than  twenty-one  Majors 
credit,  and  with  credit  for  fifteen  Majors  of  the 
work  specified  in  their  Junior  College  curricu- 
lum. 

5.  In  cases  where  prescribed   courses  are  taken 


in  the  final  Quarter  before  graduation,  no  ex- 
cuse from  examination  is  granted. 

6.  Students  whose  term  of  residence  amounts 
to  but  one  Quarter  before  graduation  are  not 
exempt  from  final  examinations. 

7.  In  case  a  student  about  to  take  a  Bachelor's 
degree  or  the  title  of  Associate  be  not  excused 
from  the  quarterly  examinations,  a  special  ex- 
amination is  held  not  later  than  a  week  pre- 
ceding the  day  of  Convocation. 

8.  An  examination  at  any  other  than  the  as- 
signed time  may  be  held  only  with  the  consent 
of  the  Dean  and  of  the  instructor  or  instructors 
concerned,  and  by  the  payment  of  an  examina- 
tion fee  of  §5  to  the  Registrar.  (See  Art.  II, 
sec.  14,  no.  10.) 

9.  Special  examinations  of  classes  in  advance  of 
the  regular  date  assigned  for  the  quarterly  ex- 
aminations are  given  only  by  authority  of  the 
Council. 

10.  In  cases  of  students  applying  for  a  sec- 
ond examination  to  make  up  a  condition  at 
any  other  time  than  at  the  regular  quarterly 
examinations,  the  consent  of  the  Dean  and  the 
payment  of  a  fee  of  ^5  are  required. 

Section  18. —  In  correspondence  work  the  stu- 
dent passes  an  examination  on  the  course  at  a 
time  convenient  to  himself  and  to  his  instructor, 
either  at  the  University,  or,  if  elsewhere,  under 
supervision  approved  by  the  student's  Dean. 

Section  19. —  For  regulations  governing  exami- 
nations for  higher  degrees,  see  Art.  XI,  sec.  6, 
no.  4,  and  sec.  9. 

Section  20. — The  following  terminology  is  em- 
ployed in  recording  the  work  of  students  : 

A  =  100  to  91. 
B=  90  to  76. 
C=  75  to  61. 
D=  60  to  51. 
E=  50  to    0. 

1.  "C"  is  the  passing  mark. 

2.  "D"  requires  a  second  examination,  which 
is  the  regular  examination  given  in  the  subject. 


*(l)  This  does  not  entitle  individual  graduate  students  to  exemption  from  the  examination  in  courses  in  which  the 
quarterly  examination  is  held.  (2)  In  case  no  examination  is  held  in  a  graduate  course  it  is  understood  that  some  paper,, 
problem,  or  exercise  is  substituted  for  the  examination  in  question. 


Article  IX 


THE  REGULATIONS 


33 


if  such  examination  recurs  in  the  Quarter  men- 
tioned and  can  be  taken  without  conflict. 
Otherwise  a  special  examination  is  taken  at  the 
time  of  the  regular  quarterly  examinations.  If 
taken  at  any  other  time  a  fee  of  J5  is  charged. 

3.  "E"  signifies  not  passed.  Those  students 
whose  standing  is  "E"  at  the  completion  of 
the  course  take  the  same  course  over  in  class 
the  next  time  it  is  offered. 

4.  Class  work  and  examination  grade  together 
have  force  as  follows  : 


Class  Work. 

Examination. 

Result. 

A 

any  grade 

= 

pa.«sed 

B 

any  grade 

= 

passed 

C 

D 

= 

passed 

C 

E 

= 

2d  exam. 

D 

C 

= 

passed 

D 

D 

= 

2d  exam. 

D 

E 

= 

not  passed 

E 

A 

= 

passed  (?) 

E 

B 

= 

not  passed 

5.  In  the  Graduate  Schools  all  grades  below 
"C"  are  equivalent  to  "not  passed." 

Section  21. — A  student  reported  as  "  not  passed  " 
in  any  course  is  notified  of  this  fact  by  the  Uni- 
versity, but  no  further  information  respecting  his 
record  is  given  to  him  or  to  others.  (But  see  Art. 
II,  sec.  5,  no.  4.)  No  appeal  from  the  record  on 
the  Recorder's  books  is  entertained  on  the  ground 
of  failure  to  receive  notice. 

Section  22. —  No  credit  is  given  for  work  in  any 
School  or  College  of  the  University  if  library  fines 
remain  unpaid.  Final  notices  of  these  fines  are 
sent  to  the  student  by  the  Recorder.  (See  Art. 
XIII,  sec.  9.) 

Section  23. —  In  general,  the  number  of  students 
in  a  class  in  the  Colleges  is  limited  to  thirty. 
Exceptions  of  this  rule  are  made  only  on  recom- 
mendation to  the  President,  the  necessary  data  in 
the  case  being  submitted  to  the  President  by  the 
Deans.  Departments  may  recommend  courses  in 
which  registration  is  unlimited. 

Section  24. — The  Seminar  is  sharply  distinguished 
from  the  ordinary  class  exercises.     The  method 


of  instruction  is  that  of  individual  investigation 
or  immediate  preparation  for  investigation  by  the 
student,  (a)  The  number  of  members  of  a  Sem- 
inar is  relatively  small,  {b^  Seminars  are  given 
only  by  competent  and  responsible  scholars. 
Special  permission  of  the  President  is  obtained  in 
every  case  when  a  Seminar  is  offered  by  any  in- 
structor below  the  rank  of  Professor,  unless  said 
instructor  is  acting  Head  of  a  Department.  (See 
Arts.  II,  sec.  13,  no.  4,  and  VII,  sec.  7.) 

ARTICLE  IX.     DISCIPLINE,  ABSENCES,  AND 
EXCUSES. 

Section  i. — All  absences  from  required  University 
exercises  are  recorded. 

1.  Absence  from  examination  is  reckoned  in  the 
case  of  a  Minor  course  as  five  absences,  and  in 
the  case  of  a  Major  course  as  ten  absences. 

2.  Students  entering  a  course  after  the  course 
begins  are  charged  with  absences  up  to  the  date 
of  registration  for  it,  registration  being  under- 
stood to  include  the  payment  of  fees  (see  Art. 
VII,  sec.  i). 

3.  Absences  incurred  by  students  in  courses  dis- 
continued are  charged  on  the  records  up  to  the 
date  of  the  change  of  registration. 

4.  Tardiness  of  fifteen  minutes  or  more  is  re- 
ported as  absence.  Habitual  tardiness  of  less 
than  fifteen  minutes  may  be  reported  as  absence 
in  the  ratio  of  three  to  one. 

Section  2. —  An  additional  Minor  is  required  for 
every  thirty  absences  accruing  in  any  two  con- 
secutive Quarters  of  a  student's  work. 

1.  Should  the  number  of  a  student's  absences  in 
any  case  reach  25  per  cent,  of  the  whole  number 
of  class  exercises  in  a  course,  credit  is  given  for 
only  one-half  of  that  course. 

2.  Should  the  number  of  absences  in  any  case 
reach  50  per  cent,  of  the  whole  number  of  class 
exercises  in  a  course,  no  credit  is  given  for  that 
course. 

Section  3. —  No  excuses  of  any  kind  for  absence 
from  class  are  accepted  except  by  special  vote  of 
the  Faculties  concerned,  or  as  hereafter  provided. 


34 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  IX 


1.  The  Deans  of  the  Junior  Colleges  are  in- 
structed not  to  present  to  the  Faculty  any 
requests  for  excuses  for  absences  until  the  pen- 
alty is  about  to  be  inflicted  (see  sec.  2). 

2.  Student  councilors  (see  Art.  XII,  sec.  2)  are 
granted  additional  absences  from  classes  for 
council  meetings  attended,  not  to  exceed  ten 
each  Quarter. 

3.  Absences  from  First  Division  meetings  are 
excusable  as  follows : 

a.  In  the  case  of  new  students. 

b.  In  the  case  of  students  delayed  by  late 
trains,  when  reasonable  allowance  has  been 
made. 

c.  In  the  case  of  students  who  are  ill,  on  pres- 
entation of  a  physician's  certificate  to  that 
effect. 

4.  The  absences  of  a  student  out  of  residence 
for  three  Quarters  are  canceled. 

5.  The  record  of  absences  from  examination  is 
canceled  when  the  examination  has  been  passed. 

6.  In  the  case  of  courses  in  which  a  grade  of 
"B"  is  received,  absences  to  the  number  of  five 
for  Senior  College  students  and  six  for  Junior 
College  students  are  canceled  by  the  Recorder, 
"B"  standing  for  an  average  of  "  B,"  that  is, 
"BB"  or  "AC." 

7.  Students  under  appointment  for  physical 
examination  are  excused  from  University  exer- 
cises occurring  at  the  same  time,  provided  that 
the  physical  examiner  gives  a  card  certifying  to 
the  presence  of  the  student  at  the  examination 
on  the  hour  appointed,  and  that  the  card  is 
presented  as  an  excuse  to  the  instructor  con- 
cerned. 

8.  Excuses  are  granted  to  student  delegates  at- 
tending the  yearly  conference  of  the  Young 
Men's  Christian  Association  on  the  following 
conditions : 

a.  The  delegates  must  not  exceed  ten  in 
number. 

b.  They  must  be  regularly  appointed  by  the 
Young  Men's  Christian  Association  of  the 
University. 


c.  Their  work   in  every  course  must  be  of 
such  grade  as  to  warrant  instructors  in  recom- 
mending their  excuse. 
9.   For  excuses  from  final  examination  granted 
to  graduating  students  in  the  Colleges  see  Art. 
VIII,  sec.  17,  nos.  3-6. 

Section  4. —  Excuses  from  Physical  Culture  are 
granted  under  the  following  rules :  {a)  All  ex- 
cuses in  Physical  Culture  are  granted  by  the  Di- 
rector of  Physical  Culture  and  the  instructor  in 
the  women's  Department.  {B)  A  list  of  such  ex- 
cuses, together  with  the  grounds  for  the  same,  is 
reported  to  the  Board  at  its  regular  meetings  to 
be  placed  on  file  with  the  Recorder.  (<:)  The 
names  of  such  persons  are  reported  to  the  Deans 
at  the  time  at  which  they  are  excused,  {d)  No 
permanent  excuse  from  Physical  Culture  is  granted 
to  any  student,  except  on  action  of  the  Boards. 
ie)  The  Board  of  Physical  Culture  grants  excuses 
for  absence  to  members  of  University  Athletic 
teams  on  conditions  prescribed  by  the  Board  in 
each  case. 

Section  5. —  Students  in  the  Junior  and  the  Sen- 
ior Colleges  whose  work  is  unsatisfactory  receive 
warning  of  the  same. 

1.  The  first  warning  is  given  by  the  Dean  and 
reported  to  the  proper  Faculty  at  the  next 
meeting,  and  a  letter  of  information  is  sent  to 
the  parents  or  guardians  of  students  under 
twenty-one  years  of  age. 

2.  As  a  second  warning,  students  are  placed  on 
the  probation  list  by  the  vote  of  the  proper 
Faculty. 

3.  The  third  warning  is  given  by  the  President 
on  vote  of  the  Faculty. 

4.  If  after  three  weeks  a  change  for  the  better 
is  not  discoverable,  the  student  is  suspended. 

Section  6. —  In  required  University  work  the 
Dean  concerned  is  authorized  to  suspend  tempo- 
rarily any  student  who  is  guilty  of  wilful  viola- 
tion of  the  requirements  of  the  University  until 
the  duty  is   performed.      In   case  of  continued 


Article  X 


THE  REGULATIONS 


35 


neglect,  he  reports  the  case  to  the  proper  Board 

or  Faculty. 

I.  The  Director  of  Physical  Culture  and  the 
Dean  concerned  are  authorized  to  investigate 
cases  of  delinquents  in  Physical  Culture,  and 
at  their  discretion,  in  view  of  the  circumstances, 
to  suspend  them  for  neglect  of  duty  (see  Art. 
XII,  sec.  15). 

Section  7. —  A  student  is  not  recommended  for 
a  degree  or  title  when  deficiencies  in  Physical 
Culture  are  incurred  on  account  of  carelessness  or 
wilfulness  on  the  part  of  the  student  in  question. 

Section  8. — The  minimum  penalty  inflicted  for 
a  first  offense  of  cheating  in  written  work  is  a 
reprimand  by  the  proper  authority,  the  canceling 
of  three  Majors  of  credit  in  addition  to  the  credit 
for  the  course  in  which  the  cheating  occurred, 
and  public  announcement  of  the  penalty  without 
mention  of  the  guilty  party. 

Section  9. —  In  extreme  cases  of  discipline  the 
President  acts  in  consultation  with  the  Deans. 

ARTICLE  X.     HONORS  AND  EMOLUMENTS. 

Section  i. — -Honors  are  awarded  in  the  Colleges 
on  the  following  basis  : 

1.  Candidates  for  the  Associate's  Title  or  the 
Bachelor's  degree  who  {a)  have  had  neither  fail- 
ure nor  condition  in  the  work  of  their  respective 
Colleges,  and  {b)  have  an  average  rank  above 
"  B,"  are  recommended  for  the  title  or  degree 
"  with  honorable  mention  for  general  scholar- 
ship." (It  is  understood  that  "  above  '  B  '  " 
shall  not  be  interpreted  so  as  to  require  more 
"A's"  than  "  B's.") 

2.  Honors  in  Departments  are  awarded  on  the 
ground  of  excellence  in  regular  work  in  a  De- 
partment to  those  who  have  had  neither  failure 
nor  condition  in  the  work  of  the  Senior  Colleges, 
have  an  average  grade  of  B,  and  a  record  of  no 
less  than  six  Majors  in  the  Department  with  dis- 
tinction. Two  or  more  closely  related  Depart- 
ments recommend  for  joint  honors  a  candidate 
who  has  pursued  with  distinction  not  less  than 


nine  Majors  in  those  Departments.  The  respec- 
tive Departments  may  specify  the  courses  to  be 
counted  as  honor  courses,  and  also  courses  as 
prerequisites  in  other  Departments. 
3.  Special  honors  in  Departments  are  awarded  to 
students  who  have  fulfilled  the  above  conditions 
for  honors  (see  no.  2),  and  have  pursued  with  dis- 
tinction certain  additional  work  prescribed  by 
the  Department.  This  work  may  be  performed 
by  the  election  of  a  fourth  course  during  each  of 
not  more  than  five  Quarters,  it  being  understood 
that  such  courses  do  not  count  toward  a  degree 
nor  involve  the  payment  of  an  additional  fee. 

Section  2. —  Each  Division  of  the  University 
elects  a  Councilor  from  its  number  to  serve  as  its 
official  representative.  This  representative  re- 
ceives the  title  of  "Student  Councilor."  (See 
Art.  XII,  sec.  2.) 

Section  3. —  The  members  of  the  Senior  College 
Councils  nominate  the  University  marshals.  The 
appointments  are  made  by  the  President  as  an 
evidence  of  the  esteem  in  which  students  thus  ap- 
pointed are  held. 

Section  4. — The  University  grants  free  tuition 
to  instructors  in  affiliated  and  co-operating  insti- 
tutions under  conditions  specified  in  Art.  XIII, 
sec.  14.  no.  7  ;  to  officers  and  their  wives  in  the 
University  (see  sec.  8,  no.  9) ;  and  in  the  ele- 
mentary and  secondary  schools  of  the  School  of 
Education  to  children  of  the  members  of  the 
Faculties  of  those  schools.  In  each  case  vouchers 
are  furnished  on  application  to  the  President's 
office. 

Section  5. —  The  University  furnishes  copies  of 
its  official  publications  and  journals  to  all  affili- 
ated institutions  without  charge,  under  certain 
specified  conditions.     (See  Art.  XVII,  sec.  5.) 

Section  6. — In  consideration  of  the  service  ex- 
pected of  these  organizations,  student  members 
of  the  University  Choir,  and  of  the  University 
Band  in  certain  cases,  receive  credit  vouchers  for 
a  portion  of  their  University  fees. 


36 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  X 


Section  7. — Prizes  for  contests  in  Public  Speak- 
ing are  offered  as  follows  : 

1.  Prizes  are  offered  to  members  of  the  Junior 
Colleges,  the  Senior  Colleges,  the  Graduate 
Schools,  and  the  Divinity  School,  respec- 
tively, for  excellence  in  Public  Speaking,  in 
accordance  with  the  regulations  found  in  Art. 
XII,  sees.  10,  and   17-20. 

2.  For  the  prizes  offered  in  the  annual  contest 
between  students  of  affiliated  and  co-operating 
schools,  see  sec.  8,  no.  10. 

Section  8. —  The  University  regulations  con- 
cerning the  assignment  and  holding  of  Scholar- 
ships are  as  follows  : 

1.  Scholarships  are  assigned  to  the  graduates 
of  certain  preparatory  schools  entering  the  Uni- 
versity: {a)  on  nomination  of  the  Principal  or 
Dean  ;  {B)  to  the  student  who  has  attained  the 
highest  rank  in  school  work;  {c)  if  he  passes 
with  credit  the  requirements  for  admission  to 
the  University  ;  (^)  if  he  enters  the  University 
without  conditions  on  or  before  the  first  day  of 
October  next  following  the  completion  of  his 
preparatory  course.  If  not  claimed  by  him 
under  these  conditions,  the  Scholarship  may  be 
assigned  on  similar  conditions  to  the  student 
of  next  highest  rank.  Approval  by  the  Presi- 
dent is  necessary  in  such  cases. 

2.  The  details  concerning  regular  and  special 
scholarships  for  students  entering  the  Univer- 
sity, their  number,  the  stipend  of  each,  and  the 
conditions  on  which  they  are  awarded,  are 
found  in  the  Circular  of  Fellowships  and  Schol- 
arships. 

3.  The  University  regulations  concerning  the 
assignment  and  holding  of  Scholarships  for 
students  already  in  the  University  are  as  fol- 
lows : 

a.  The  twelve  Scholarships  open  to  those 
who  have  completed  the  work  of  a  Junior  Col- 
lege are  assigned:  (i)  on  the  nomination  of 
the  Faculty  of  the  Junior  Colleges ;  (2)  to 
those  of  the  highest  rank  in  the  various  De- 
partments thereof,  nominated  by  said  Depart- 


ments, the  names  being  arranged  by  each 
Department  in  the  order  of  desirability  of  ap- 
pointment; (3)  at  the  Convocation  of  the 
Spring  Quarter  ;  (4)  the  stipend  in  no  case 
extending  beyond  the  end  of  the  Spring 
Quarter  next  following;  (5)  each  Depart- 
ment takes  into  consideration  the  general 
quality  of  the  candidate's  work  throughout 
the  Junior  Colleges,  the  quality  and  quan- 
tity of  his  work  in  that  Department,  the  result 
of  a  special  examination  offered  at  the  dis- 
cretion of  the  Department ;  (6)  students  ad- 
mitted to  the  Junior  Colleges  with  advanced 
standing  are  eligible  to  these  Scholarships 
provided  they  have  done  one  year's  work  in 
the  University. 

b.  The  twenty  Scholarships  open  to  those  who 
have  completed  the  work  of  a  Senior  Col- 
lege are  assigned  (i)  on  the  nomination  of 
the  Board  of  the  Senior  Colleges;  (2)  acting 
on  nominations  made  by  Departments ;  (3) 
provided  that  the  student  continue  his  studies 
in  the  Graduate  Schools. 

4.  The  details  concerning  regular  and  special 
Scholarships  for  College  work,  their  number,  the 
stipend  of  each,  the  particular  conditions  at- 
tached to  each,  are  found  in  the  Circular  of 
Fellowships  and  Scholarships. 

5.  The  details  concerning  regular  and  special 
Scholarships  in  the  Divinity  School,  their  num- 
ber, the  stipend  of  each,  the  particular  con- 
ditions attached  to  each,  are  found  in  the  Circu- 
lar of  Fellowships  and  Scholarships. 

6.  A  student  cannot  hold  a  Scholarship  while 
at  the  same  time  engaged  in  any  remunerative 
work. 

7.  A  student  cannot  hold  two  Scholarships  at 
the  same  time. 

8.  A  Scholarship  in  the  Divinity  School  yield- 
ing more  than  ^35  per  Quarter  is  withdrawn  in 
case  the  incumbent  marries  while  holding  it. 

9.  Forty  Scholarships  each  yielding  tuition  fees 
for  three  Quarters  are  assigned  annually  to 
members  of  the  Faculties  or  to  wives  of  members 


Article  X 


THE  REGULATIONS 


37 


who  may  desire  to  take  courses  of  instruction  in 
the  University. 

10.  Two  Scholarships  are  offered  as  prizes  in 
the  Annual  Contest  in  Public  Speaking  between 
students  of  affiliated  and  co-operating  schools 
held  at  the  University  in  connection  with  the 
Annual  Autumn  Conference  of  the  University 
and  the  secondary  schools. 

Section  9. — The  University  regulations  concern- 
ing the  assignment  and  holding  of  Fellowships 
are  as  follows  : 

1.  Fellowships  are  assigned  at  the  University 
during  the  first  week  in  April  of  each  year. 
All  candidates  fill  out  an  application  blank  to 
be  filed  with  the  President  of  the  University 
before  March  i. 

2.  The  Fellowships  of  the  University  are  as- 
signed upon  the  nomination  of  a  Department, 
names  of  nominees  being  arranged  in  the  or- 
der of  desirability  of  appointment  and  accom- 
panied by  full  statements  as  to  their  general 
and  scholarly  ability,  upon  recommendation  of 
the  President  of  the  University  and  by  a  vote 
of  the  Board  of  Trustees.  Such  assignment 
depends  solely  on  the  proficiency  already  at- 
tained by  the  candidate  in  the  said  Department. 
Departments,  in  nominating,  may  present  alter- 
nates. 

3.  The  details  concerning  regular  Fellowships, 
their  number,  the  stipend  of  each,  as  well  as 
those  concerning  special  Fellowships  and  the 
particular  conditions  attached  to  each  are  found 
in  the  Circular  of  Fellowships  and  Scholarships. 

4.  Fellowships  available  for  students  in  the 
Graduate  Divinity  School  are  assigned  on  the 
conditions  indicated  in  the  Circular  of  Fellow- 
ships and  Scholarships. 

5.  No  departmental  Faculty  recommends  as  a 
candidate  for  a  Fellowship  one  who  at  the  same 
time  might  not  be  available  as  a  candidate  for 
the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy. 

6.  Nominations  for  appointments  to  Fellow- 
ships are  made  by  the  vote  of  the  members  of 
the  Faculties  of  Departments  as  a  whole,  it  be- 


ing understood  that,  in  voting,  all  instructors 
having  appointment  for  two  years  or  more  are 
entitled  to  vote. 

7.  The  Fellow  is  expected  to  give  one-sixth  of 
his  time  to  some  service  in  connection  with 
the  University  (see  sec.  10). 

8.  The  Fellow  is  not  permitted  while  holding  a 
fellowship  to  do  remunerative  work  of  any  kind 
without  the  permission  of  the  President. 

9.  A  Fellowship  may,  on  recommendation  of 
the  Department,  and  with  the  approval  of  the 
President,  carry  with  it  the  tuition  fee  for  the 
Spring  Quarter,  provided  that  the  Fellow  has 
already  paid  the  tuition  fees  for  the  three  Quar- 
ters immediately  preceding. 

10.  A  student  who  has  held  a  Fellowship  may, 
on  recommendation  of  his  Department,  con- 
tinue to  hold  the  rank  of  Fellow,  without  sti- 
pend, during  his  residence  in  the  University. 

11.  During  the  term  of  appointment  a  Fellow 
in  the  Divinity  School  may  not  have  pastoral 
charge  of  a  church  or  do  outside  work  for 
pecuniary  compensation  without  the  special 
permission  of  the  Faculty  or  the  President. 

12.  The  Fellow  makes  to  the  President,  at  the 
beginning  of  each  Quarter,  a  written  report, 
certified  by  the  Head  or  Acting  Head  of  his 
Department,  indicating  the  courses  chosen  as  a 
student  and  the  work  assigned  as  an  officer  of 
the  University  for  the  current  Quarter  and  for 
the  previous  Quarter. 

Section  10. — Students  receiving  Scholarships  or 
Fellowships  are  expected  to  render  assistance  of 
some  kind  in  connection  with  the  work  of  the 
University. 

1.  Students  receiving  Scholarships  are  expected 
to  render  assistance  in  the  Libraries,  Labora- 
tories, and  Museums  in  amount  to  be  deter- 
mined by  the  Board  of  Libraries,  Laboratories, 
and  Museums. 

2.  Students  receiving  Fellowships  are  expected 
to  render  assistance  for  the  most  part  consisting 
in  service  as  an  instructor,  as  assistant  in  read 


38 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XI 


ing  examination  papers,  or  as  assistant  in  the 
Departmental  Libraries. 

3.  In  no  case  is  a  student  expected  or  allowed 
to  devote  more  than  one-sixth  of  his  time  to 
such  assistance. 

ARTICLE  XI.     GRADUATION,    INCLUDING    CANDI- 
DACY AND  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  DEGREES. 

Section  i. — A  diploma  or  certificate  conferring 
a  degree  or  a  title,  or  testifying  to  the  completion 
of  a  course  of  study,  is  awarded  to  each  student 
completing  the  requirements  in  a  School,  College, 
or  Academy  as  follows: 

1.  Certificates  are  awarded:  {a)  in  the  Acad- 
emy for  Boys;  {b)  in  the  English  Theological 
Seminary;  {c)  in  the  Swedish  and  Dano-Nor- 
wegian  Theological  Seminaries;  (d)  in  the 
College  of  Education. 

2.  The  title  of  Associate  in  Arts,  Philosophy, 
or  Science  in  the  Junior  Colleges. 

3.  The  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Arts,  Philosophy, 
or  Science  in  the  Senior  Colleges. 

4.  The  usual  college  titles  and  degrees  in  Uni- 
versity College. 

5.  The  degree  of  Master  of  Arts,  Philosophy, 
or  Science  and  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  in  the 
Graduate  Schools. 

6.  The  degrees  of  Bachelor  of  Divinity,  Master 
of  Arts,  and  Doctor  of  Philosophy  in  the 
Divinity  School. 

7.  The  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Education  in  the 
College  of  Education. 

8.  The  degrees  of  Bachelor  of  Laws  and  Doc- 
tor of  Law  in  the  Law  School. 

Q.  The  honorary  degrees  of  Doctor  of  Divinity 

and  Doctor  of  Laws,  awarded  by  the  University 

for    specific    achievements    in    some    field    of 

scholarship,  discovery,  or  administration. 

Section  2.^Any  regular  student  in  the  Academy, 

the    Junior    Colleges,  the    Senior   Colleges,  the 

Divinity  School,  the  English,  Swedish,  or  Dano- 

Norwegian  Theological  Seminaries,  the  Law  School 

or  the  College  of  Education  is  a  candidate  for  the 

certificate,  title,  or  degree  of  that  Division  of  the 

University. 


Section  2a.  —  The  degree  of  Doctor  of  Law 
(J.D.)  is  given  to  regular  students  in  the  Law 
School  who  have  completed  twenty-seven  Majors 
of  law  work  and  the  practice  courses,  distributed 
over  nine  Quarters  of  law-school  residence.  At 
least  nine  Majors  and  three  Quarters  of  this  must 
have  been  at  the  University  of  Chicago  Law 
School.  The  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Law  is  given 
to  unclassified  students  twenty-four  years  old  who 
are  qualified  to  enter  the  Junior  Colleges,  and  who 
have  completed  the  above  work  with  distinction. 

Section  3. — A  student  is  admitted  to  candidacy 
for  a  higher  degree  in  any  School  on  the  following 
general  conditions: 

1.  If  his  undergraduate  course  is  equivalent  to 
that  in  the  Colleges  of  the  University  (see  sees. 
4-6). 

2.  If  he  has  been  in  residence  one  Quarter  or 
more  in  the  School. 

3.  On  recommendation  of  the  Department  or 
Departments  in  which  he  wishes  to  work  he  is 
accepted  by  the  Faculty  of  the  School. 

4.  Graduates  of  approved  institutions  who 
become  candidates  for  a  higher  degree  are,  as 
a  general  rule,  allowed  to  depart  from  the 
regulations  of  the  University  for  the  Bachelor's 
degree  to  the  extent  of  three  Majors,  but  no 
deficiency  in  quantity  is  allowed  (see  sees.  5 
and  6). 

5.  Substitutes  for  the  specified  work  required 
for  the  Bachelor's  degree  of  this  University,  to 
the  amount  of  eight  Majors  reckoned  by  Col- 
lege standards,  are  granted  to  candidates  for  a 
higher  degree: 

a.  In  the  case  of  a  student  appointed  to  a 
Fellowship  or  Scholarship,  when  the  substitu- 
tion is  recommended  by  the  Department  in 
which  the  principal  work  is  done. 

b.  In  other  cases,  by  a  majority  vote  of  the 
University  Senate. 

6.  Students  holding  engineering  degrees  from 
institutions  of  good  standing  are  admitted  to 
candidacy  for  the  higher  degrees  under  the  rules 
which    govern  the  admission   of    holders  of  a 


Article  XI 


THE  REGULATIONS 


39 


Bachelor's  degree.  As  far  as  the  equivalence  of 
the  undergraduate  course  to  that  required  for  a 
Bachelor's  degree  in  the  University  is  concerned, 
this  equivalence  is  allowed,  provided  that :  (a)  the 
student  has  completed  the  specified  work  re- 
quired for  the  Bachelor's  degree,  six  Majors' 
substitution  being  accepted  according  to  the 
rules  laid  down  for  candidates  for  a  Bachelor's 
degree  ;  {b)  the  student  has  completed  at  least 
six  Majors  of  work  in  Pure  Science  (not  Applied 
Science)  in  College  courses  corresponding  to 
those  given  in  the  University  ;  (<r)  the  rest  of  the 
work  of  the  student,  e.  g.,  in  Applied  Science, 
is  sufficient  in  amount  and  character,  to  make 
altogether  a  four-years'  college  course.  (An 
excess  amount  of  mechanical  drawing  or  shop 
work  is  not  accepted). 

Section  4. — ^The  following  special  regulations 
condition  admission  to  candidacy  for  the  degrees 
in  question  : 

1.  In  the  case  of  the  degrees  of  Master  of  Arts 
and  Doctor  of  Philosophy  in  the  Divinity  School, 
a  student  completes  the  course  of  instruction 
outlined  in  Art.  VIII,  sec.  14,  no.  i  ;  fulfils  the 
regulations  in  Art.  VIII,  sec.  14,  no.  3,  a  tod; 
and,  in  case  of  the  Doctor  of  Philosophy  degree, 
selects  a  secondary  subject. 

2.  In  the  case  of  the  degree  of  Doctor  of 
Philosophy,  in  any  School,  the  student  has  a 
reading  knowledge  of  French  and  German  cer- 
tified to  by  the  Departments  of  Romance  and 
Germanic  Languages  in  the  University,  and  the 
subject  for  his  dissertation  is  accepted  by  the 
Head  of  his  principal  Department. 

3.  A  graduate  student  holding  any  Bachelor's 
degree  and  devoting  himself  to  any  Department 
of  study  is  admitted  to  candidacy  for  any  Mas- 
ter's degree,  provided  that,  also,  he  has  done 
the  work  required  for  a  corresponding  Bache- 
lor's degree  in  the  University. 

Sections- — Candidates  obtain  certificates,  titles, 
and  college  degrees  on  the  following  conditions  : 
I.  They  satisfy  all  admission  requirements. 


2.  They  obtain  credit  for  the  full  number  of 
required  and  elective  Majors  of  the  curriculum 
of  the  Academy,  College,  or  School  in  which 
they  are  working  (except  as  provided  in  Art. 
VIII,  sec.  8,  No.  4). 

3.  They  have  been  in  actual  residence  at  the 
University  at  least  three  Quarters  (except  as  pro- 
vided in  sec.  7). 

4.  They  may,  when  graduate  students,  on  com- 
pletion of  the  requirements  for  the  Bachelor's 
degree,  receive  the  degree  without  registering 
in  the  Senior  Colleges,  when  recommended  foi 
such  degree  by  the  United  Faculties. 

5.  They  are  present  in  person  at  the  Convoca- 
tion at  which  the  certificate,  title,  or  degree  is 
granted.  Excuse  from  this  requirement  is 
obtained  only  in  the  case  of  the  certificate,  title, 
and  Bachelor's  degree,  and  in  that  case  by  a 
special  vote  of  the  University  Council. 

6.  Students  of  the  Junior  Colleges  who  either 
{a)  are  not  reported  to  the  Recorder  as  free 
from  conditions,  two  weeks  before  the  day  of 
Convocation  ;  or  {b)  who  under  existing  rules 
are  not  exempt  from  examinations  in  the  last 
Quarter  of  the  course  (see  Art.  VIII,  sec.  17, 
nos.  4-6),  are  ineligible  to  the  title  of  Associate 
at  the  Convocation  when  the  title  would  ordi- 
narily be  granted. 

Section  6. — Students  admitted  to  candidacy  for 
higher  degrees  obtain  them  on  the  following  gen- 
eral conditions  : 

1.  Resident  graduate  work  as  follows  :  for  the 
Master's  degree,  three  Quarters ;  for  the  Doc- 
tor's degree,  three  years,  or,  in  the  Graduate 
Divinity  School,  four  years.  (See  special  pro- 
vision in  sec.  7,  nos.  6-8.) 

2.  Registration  during  the  Quarter  in  which 
the  examination  for  the  degree  takes  place. 

3.  The  successful  completion  of  a  course  of 
study  acceptable  to  the  Department  in  which 
the  work  is  done.  For  special  curriculum  re- 
quirements, see  sec.  8. 

4.  The  passing  of  a  final  examination,  written 


40 


THE   UNIVERSITY  OF  CHIC  A  GO 


Article  XI 


or  oral  or  both,  at  the  discretion  of  the  examin- 
ing committee.  For  special  examination  re- 
quirements see  sec.  9. 

5.  The  preparation  and  presentation  of  a  satis- 
factory dissertation,  except  in  the  case  of  the 
non-specialist  Master's  degree  (see  sec.  8,  no- 
3).  For  special  dissertation  requirements,  see 
sec.  10. 

6.  The  favorable  report  of  the  examining  com- 
mittee, the  recommendation  of  Ruling  Bodies 
concerned,  and  the  conferring  of  the  degree  by 
the  Board  of  Trustees  through  the  President. 

7.  Presence  in  person  at  the  Convocation  at 
which  the  degree  is  given. 

Section  7. — Special  regulations  governing  the 
term  of  residence  necessary  for  graduation  are 
as  follows  : 

1.  No  degree  is  given  without  at  least  one  year 
(three  Quarters)  of  full  resident  work. 

2.  Students  who  have  taken  a  degree  for  two 
years'  work  in  schools  under  the  supervision  of 
the  University  may  take  the  title  of  Associate 
after  a  Quarter  of  residence  at  the  University. 

3.  Students  who  have  obtained  a  Bachelor's 
degree  from  certain  colleges  afifiliated  with  the 
University  may  obtain  the  Bachelor's  degree 
of  the  University  after  a  Quarter  of  residence. 

4.  Students  in  the  English  Theological  Semi- 
nary obtain  the  certificate  after  a  residence  of 
at  least  four  Quarters. 

5.  Students  in  the  Graduate  Divinity  School 
obtain  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy 
after  a  course  of  study  requiring  at  least  four 
years  of  resident  work,  of  which  the  last  two 
years  are  spent  in  residence  at  the  University  of 
Chicago. 

6.  Students  presenting  advanced  credit  shorten 
the  time  required  for  residence  for  certain  de- 
grees.    (See  Art.  VI,  sec.  13  ;   Art.   VIII,  sec. 

13,  no.  I,  and  sec.  14,  no.  7.) 

7.  Non-resident  work  accepted  in  lieu  of  work 
in  residence  shortens  the  time  required  for 
residence.     (See  Art.  VIII,  sec.  13,  no.  2,  sec. 

14,  no.  4.)     Non-resident  work  cannot  be  ac- 


cepted as  affording  any  time  credit  in  the 
course  for  the  medical  degree. 
8.  In  exceptional  cases  the  degree  of  Doctor  of 
Philosophy  may  be  granted  after  one  year  of 
residence  at  the  University  of  Chicago,  work 
having  been  done  in  other  institutions. 
Section  8. — Special  regulations  governing  the 
curriculum  are  as  follows  : 

1.  Each  Department  of  instruction  decides  what 
courses  of  instruction  are  accepted  in  its  Depart- 
ment for  higher  degrees. 

2.  Work  done  in  other  universities  may  be  sub- 
stituted for  work  in  the  University  according  to 
the  regulations  found  in  Art.  VI,  sec.  13;  Art. 
VIII,  sec.  13,  no.  i,  sec.  14,  no.  7. 

3.  If  the  degree  of  Master  in  the  Graduate 
Schools  be  taken  as  a  specialist  degree,  at  least 
seven  Majors  of  resident  graduate  work,  all 
falling  in  one  Department,  and  a  dissertation, 
are  required.  If  it  be  taken  as  a  non-specialist 
degree,  there  are  required  nine  Majors  of  resi- 
dent graduate  work  distributed  among  three 
Departments  (not  more  than  six  Majors  falling 
in  any  one  group  of  Departments),  without  a 
dissertation ;  but  the  respective  Departments 
must  approve  in  writing,  in  advance,  at  the 
time  of  the  student's  admission  to  candidacy, 
the  specific  courses  to  be  offered  for  the  degree, 
and  any  Department  is  at  liberty  to  require 
other  courses  to  be  taken  as  preliminary  to  those 
thus  approved.  In  any  case  Seminar  courses  are 
counted  toward  the  Master's  degree  only  by 
special  consent  of  the  Department  concerned. 

4.  For  the  degree  of  Master  of  Arts  in  the 
Divinity  School,  twenty-seven  Majors  are  re- 
quired, of  which  thirteen  are  specified  as  pre- 
liminary to  candidacy.  (See  Art.  VIII,  sec.  14, 
no.  I.)  Of  the  remaining  Majors  three  are  to 
be  taken  from  Homiletic  or  Pedagogic  courses, 
and  the  remaining  two  may  be  done  in  any  De- 
partments of  the  Divinity  or  Graduate  Schools, 
which  are  approved  by  the  Department  in  ques- 
tion. 

5.  For    the    degree    of    Bachelor    of    Divinity 


Article  XI 


THE  REGULATIONS 


41 


twenty-seven  Majors  are  required,  of  which 
thirteen  are  specified  as  preliminary  to  accept- 
ance for  candidacy.  (See  Art.  VIII,  sec.  14, 
no.  I.)  Of  the  remaining  fourteen  Majors 
three  are  to  be  taken  from  Homiletic  or  Peda- 
gogical courses,  and  eleven  are  chosen  under 
the  direction  of  the  adviser.  (See  Art.  VIII, 
sec.  14,  no.  3.)  Of  the  twenty-seven  Majors 
eighteen  may  have  been  pursued  at  a  theo- 
logical institution  of  high  standing. 
6.  For  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  in 
the  Graduate  Schools  the  requirements  are  : 

a.  One  principal  and  either  one  or  two  sec- 
ondary subjects  are  chosen,  each  acceptable 
to  the  head  of  the  Department  concerned. 

b.  Not  more  than  two-thirds  of  the  work  may 
be  done  in  one  Department,  and  work  count- 
ing toward  the  degree  in  not  more  than  three 
Departments,  except  when  such  work  is  ac- 
cepted as  equivalent  to  work  done  in  the 
Department  itself. 

c.  The  minimum  requirement  in  a  secondary 
subject  taken  by  a  candidate  for  the  degree 
of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  is  one  year  (three 
Quarters)  of  full  work  (that  is  to  say,  work 
corresponding,  in  the  judgment  of  the  De- 
partment, to  nine  Majors). 

d.  The  candidate  who  has  already  done  in 
another  university  the  whole  or  a  part  of  the 
work  which  would  be  accepted  by  the  pro- 
posed secondary  Department  in  this  Uni- 
versity as  sufificient,  takes,  nevertheless,  an 
amount  of  work  in  that  Department  corre- 
sponding to  at  least  three  Majors  ;  and  this 
work  is  of  a  strictly  advanced  character. 

e.  If  a  candidate  for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of 
Philosophy  takes  two  secondary  subjects,  the 
minimum  requirement  is  two-thirds  of  a  full 
year's  work  in  one  of  them  (that  is  to  say, 
work  corresponding,  in  the  judgment  of  the 
Department  concerned,  to  six  Majors),  and 
one-third  of  a  full  year's  work  in  the  other 
(that  is  to  say,  work  corresponding,  in  the 
judgment  of  the  Department  concerned,  to 


three  Majors) ;  and  of  these  amounts  at  least 
three  Majors  in  each  subject  are  of  a  strictly 
advanced  character. 

f.  A  good  command  of  literary  expression 
and  such  knowledge  of  subjects  considered 
fundamental  as  may  be  prescribed  by  the 
several  Departments  is  required. 
7.  For  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  in 
the  Divinity  School  the  requirements  are : 

a.  One  principal  and  one  secondary  subject 
are  chosen.  The  principal  subject  is  selected 
from  Departments  XLI,  XLII,  XLIV,  XLV, 
XLVI  in  the  Graduate  Divinity  School. 

b.  Not  more  than  two-thirds  of  the  work  may 
be  done  in  the  principal  Department. 

c.  If  the  Degree  of  Bachelor  of  Divinity  or 
Master  of  Arts  has  been  taken,  the  work 
thus  done  may  be  offered  for  the  degree  of 
Doctor  of  Philosophy  so  far  as  it  falls  within 
the  Departments  chosen. 

Section  9.  —  Special  regulations  governing  the 
examination  preliminary  to  obtaining  degrees  are 
as  follows  : 

1.  The  public  oral  examination  for  the  degree 
of  Master  or  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  is  con- 
ducted by  an  examining  committee  (see  no.  2), 
and  does  not  exceed  two  hours  in  length  in  the 
case  of  the  Master's  degree  and  three  hours  in 
the  case  of  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy. 
Notice  of  the  same  is  published  in  the  Weekly 
Calendar  at  least  one  week  in  advance. 

2.  The  Examining  Committee  consists  of  all 
the  instructors  of  the  Departments  concerned, 
ex  officio,  and  one  or  more  members  appointed 
by  the  President.  The  President  also  names 
the  chairman  of  the  Committee.  In  all  exami- 
nations for  the  Doctor's  degree  in  Greek  and 
Latin  the  members  of  all  Departments  repre- 
sented in  the  Classical  Group  are  understood 
to  be  included  in  this  regulation  as  "  Depart- 
ments concerned." 

3.  The  oral  examination  for  the  degree  of 
Doctor  of  Philosophy  is  taken  within  four 
months  after  the  approval  of  the  dissertation, 


42 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XI 


unless  the  time  be  extended  by  the  Senate  upon 
the  recommendation  of  the  Heads  of  the  De- 
partments concerned.     (See  no.  6  below.) 

4.  The  candidate  for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of 
Philosophy  is  admitted  to  final  examination 
only  when  the  thesis  is  complete  and  ready  for 
the  printer  (see  also  sec.  10).  By  "complete  " 
is  meant  that  every  chapter  or  considerable 
subdivision  of  the  document  is  worked  out  with 
such  fulness  that  it  is  practicable  to  make  all 
the  necessary  corrections  and  additions  on  the 
proof. 

5.  No  examination  for  a  higher  degree  is  held 
within  the  last  week  before  the  Convocation  at 
which  the  degree  is  to  be  conferred. 

6.  The  candidate  for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of 
Philosophy  may  present  himself  for  examina- 
tion in  his  secondary  subject  as  soon  as  he  has 
fulfilled  the  requirements  of  the  Department 
concerned.  The  examination  is  conducted  by 
a  committee  consisting  of  the  members  of  the 
Department,  a  representative  of  the  principal 
Department,  and  a  representative  of  another 
Department,  and  the  grade  attained  is  reported 
to  the  Recorder. 

7.  In  case  a  candidate  has  already  taken  the 
examination  in  his  secondary  Department,  the 
examination  in  his  principal  subject  is  con- 
ducted by  an  Examining  Committee  consisting 
of  the  members  of  the  Department  concerned, 
an  appointed  representative  of  the  secondary 
Department,  or  each  of  them,  by  any  other 
members  of  the  said  Department  that  may 
choose  to  attend,  and  by  a  member  of  some 
other  Department  appointed   by  the  President. 

8.  The  candidate  for  any  final  examination  for 
the  higher  degree  prepares  a  typewritten  or 
printed  brief  of  his  work,  including  an  analysis 
of  the  dissertation,  and  files  with  the  Recorder 
copies  of  the  same,  sufficient  in  number  for  the 
Examining  Committee,  one  week  before  the 
time  set  for  the  examination.  In  case  of  an 
examination  in  the  secondary  Department,  the 
brief   includes   the  work   in  this  Department. 


The  brief  Jor  the  final  examination   includes 

the  work  of  both  Departments. 

Section  10. —  Special  regulations  governing  the 
dissertation  in  the  case  of  the  higher  degrees  are 
as  follows: 

1.  Students  who  have  reached  their  third  year 
of  graduate  study  and  are,  in  the  judgment  of 
the  instructors  concerned,  prepared  to  enter 
upon  the  direct  work  of  the  thesis  for  the  de- 
gree of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  may,  within  the 
judgment  of  the  Department  in  which  the  the- 
sis is  to  be  presented,  be  free  for  that  work.  In 
this  case  the  usual  fees  are  paid. 

2.  The  subject  of  the  dissertation  in  the  case  of 
the  Doctor's  degree  in  the  Graduate  Schools  is 
submitted  for  approval  to  the  Head  of  the  De- 
partment at  least  twelve  months  before  the  date 
of  the  final  examination. 

3.  The  dissertation  itself  is  submitted  in  writ- 
ten form  four  months  before  the  date  of  the 
final  examination  (unless  postponement  is  au- 
thorized by  the  Senate  upon  recommendation 
of  the  Head  of  the  Department  concerned). 

4.  Dissertation  work  may  be  done  in  collabora- 
tion with  the  instructor  on  the  following  con- 
ditions: 

a.  The  student  should  be  given  the  choice 
of  selecting  a  second  subject  on  which  he  is 
allowed  to  publish  alone. 

b.  The  student  submits  a  written  dissertation 
on  such  part  of  the  joint  work  as  was  allotted 
to  him  for  original  investigation,  on  the  basis 
of  which  he  desires  to  receive  the  degree  of 
Doctor  of  Philosophy. 

c.  This  dissertation  should  be  printed  sepa- 
rately. 

d.  Should  the  joint  paper  appear  before  the 
dissertation  is  printed,  or  should  it  be  una- 
voidably delayed,  the  time  allowed  for  the 
printing  of  the  dissertation  may  be  suitably 
extended  at  the  request  of  the  instructor. 

5.  Dissertations  for  the  degree  of  Master  and 
of  Doctor  of  Philosophy,  after  receiving  the 
approval  of   the    Departments  concerned,   are 


Article  XI 


THE  REGULATIONS 


43 


deposited  in  the  Library  at  least  three  weeks 
before  the  date  of  the  Convocation  at  which 
the  degrees  are  to  be  conferred,  and  notices  of 
the  dissertations  thus  deposited  are  given  to 
the  Faculties  concerned. 

6.  In  the  title-page  required  for  all  disserta- 
tions the  official  name  of  the  University  is 
placed  at  the  head  of  the  title-page,  and  the 
name  of  the  Department  to  which  the  disserta- 
tion is  offered  is  designated  in  marks  of  paren- 
thesis at  the  end  of  the  statement  that  the 
dissertation  is  offered  in  candidacy  for  the 
degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy.  The  proper 
form  is  as  follows  : 

Ube  Taniversitis  of  Cbfcago 

FOUNDED  BY  JOHN  D.  ROCKEFELLER 


<Title) 


A    DISSERTATION 

SUBMITTED   TO  THE    FACULTY 
OF    THE 

(graduate   SCHOOL   OF   ARTS   AND   LITERATURE) 
(OGDEN   GRADUATE    SCHOOL  OF   SCIENCE) 
(GRADUATE   DIVINITY    SCHOOL) 

IN   CANDIDACY   FOR  THE   DEGREE   OF 
DOCTOR  OF   PHILOSOPHY 


(Department  of- 


{Name  of  Author)- 


19- 


7.  A  brief  of  the   dissertation   accompanies  the 
brief    of   work    required.     (See    sec.  9,   no.  8.) 

8.  A  dissertation  is  required  for  the  Master's 
degree  in  the  Graduate  Schools  when  it  is 
taken  as  a  specialist  degree.  (See  sec.  8,  no.  3.) 
In  this  case  the  subject  is  submitted  for  ap- 
proval to  the  Head  of  the  Department  in  which 
the  principal  work  is  done,  at  least  six  months 
before  graduation,  and  the  completed  dis- 
sertation at  least  two  months  before  gradu- 
ation. The  title  page  of  the  Master's  disser- 
tation must,  in  form,  agree  with  that  of  the 
Doctor's  dissertation.  The  paper  on  which  the 
dissertation  is  written  is  of  uniform  size  (8J^ 
X  II  inches),  and  of  a  quality  approved  by  the 
Librarian  of  the  University,  from  whom  sam- 
ples are  obtained.  Five  printed  or  typewritten 
copies  are  deposited  in  the  University  Library. 
A  copy  for  preservation  in  the  Library  is  bound 
in  dark  cloth  and  shows  the  title  of  the  thesis, 
either  stamped  on  the  cover  in  gilt  lettering 
or  written  out  on  a  slip  and  pasted  on  the  out- 
side covering. 

9.  The  dissertation  for  the  degrees  of  Bach- 
elor of  Divinity  and  Master  of  Arts  in  the 
Divinity  School,  in  addition  to  the  require- 
ments in  the  preceding  paragraphs,  are  submit- 
ted for  final  criticism,  in  typewritten  form,  six 
weeks  before  the  final  examination.  The  sub- 
ject has  been  submitted  for  approval  to  the 
instructor  to  whose  Department  it  pertains,  at 
least  twelve  months  before  the  date  of  the  final 
examination.  A  dissertation  already  pre- 
sented in  regular  class  work  may  be  offered  for 
this  purpose.  In  the  case  of  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Divinity,  two  printed  or  typewrit- 
ten copies,  and  in  the  case  of  the  degree  of 
Master  of  Arts,  five  printed  or  typewritten  cop- 
ies, are  deposited  with  the  Librarian.  One  copy 
of  each  is  bound  as  described  in  no.  8  (above). 

10.  The  dissertation  for  the  degree  of  Doctor 
of  Philosophy  in  the  Divinity  School,  in  addi- 
tion to  the  requirements  in  the  preceding  para- 
graphs, is  also  presented  in  typewritten   form, 


44 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XI 


upon  the  thesis  paper  prescribed  by  the  Uni- 
versity, six  weeks  before  the  date  of  the  final 
examination. 

11.  For  the  relation  of  the  dissertation  to  ad- 
mission to  the  examination  and  to  recommen- 
dation for  the  degree,  see  sees.  9,  no.  4,  and  11, 
nos.  3  and  4. 

12.  After  acceptance,  one  hundred  printed  cop- 
ies of  the  dissertation  for  the  degree  of  Doctor 
of  Philosophy  are  deposited  in  the  Library 
within  six  months  after  the  date  of  the  final 
examinations.  These  copies  become  the  prop- 
erty of  the  University.  (See  Art.  II,  sec.  14, 
no.  15,  and  Art.  XV,  sec.  9,  no.  2.)  Two 
copies  of  each  thesis  are  offered  bound  in  boards 
in  a  style  approved  by  the  Librarian  of  the  Uni- 
versity, from  whom  samples  may  be  secured 
upon  application. 

13.  The  printing  of  the  dissertation  conforms 
to  the  following  conditions  : 

a.  The  form  of  all  printed  dissertations  is  that 
usually  employed  by  publishers  in  printing 
monography,  viz.  :  royal  octavo  or  quarto. 
In  general  theses  will  be  published  as  octavo, 
but  if  the  character  of  the  material  is  such  as 
to  require  a  quarto  page  permission  may  be 
secured  to  employ  this  size  upon  application 
to  the  Board  of  Libraries,  Laboratories,  and 
Museums.  The  style  of  type  face  is  left  to 
the  discretion  of  the  author  or  printer. 

The  definite  specifications  for  theses  issued 
in  octavo  are  as  follows  : 

1.  The  dimensions  of  the  letter  press  shall 
be  6^X4>^,  to  be  printed  on  stock,  the 
exterior  dimensions  of  which  shall  be  9^  X 
65^  trimmed. 

2.  The  stock  shall  be  271^X39,  75  lb. 
all  rag  machine  finish  laid. 

3.  The  title  page  and  cover  shall  be  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  style  shown  on  page  43. 

The  definite  specifications  for  theses  issued 
in  quarto  are  as  follows: 
I.  The  dimensions  of  the  letter  press  shall 
be   5/^  X  7^,  to  be  printed   on  stock,   the 


exterior  dimensions  of  which  shall  be  %y%  X 
113^,  trimmed. 

2.  The  stock  shall  be  24  x  36,  70  lb.  machine 
finish  laid,  all  rag. 

3.  The   title  page   and  cover  shall  be  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  style  shown  on  page  43. 

b.  Candidates  have  their  dissertations  printed 
by  the  University  Press  except  when  printed 
in  scientific  journals,  subject  to  the  approval 
of  the  Board  of  Libraries,  Laboratories,  and 
Museums,  to  whom  application  should  be 
made  through  the  University  Recorder,  and 
with  the  consent  of  the  Head  of  the  Depart- 
ment concerned.  Applicants  for  leave  to  print 
elsewhere  than  at  the  University  Press  will 
be  furnished  by  the  Librarian  of  the  Univer- 
sity with  "dummies"  showing  the  required 
standard,  and  submit,  before  their  request  is 
granted,  samples  of  paper  and  typography 
from  the  printing  establishment  at  which  the 
dissertation  is  to  be  printed,  which  samples 
shall  satisfy  the  Librarian  of  the  University 
that  the  work  will  be  of  the  required  standard. 
In  all  cases  where  the  dissertation  is  printed 
elsewhere  the  candidate  furnishes  to  the 
University  copies  which  are  separate  prints, 
without  separate  pagination,  containing  no 
other  material,  and  which  are  put  in  paper 
covers  in  accordance  with  the  foregoing 
specifications. 
Section  11. —  The  sale  or  publication  of  disserta- 
tions conforms  to  the  following  conditions  : 

1.  Arrangements  may  be  made  through  the  Re- 
tail Department  of  the  University  Press,  on  the 
usual  trade  conditions,  for  the  sale  of  disserta- 
tions which  are  privately  printed.  Consign- 
ments are  accepted  at  a  discount  of  25  per  cent, 
off  the  net  retail  price.  The  same  applies  to 
dissertations  appearing  in  scientific  journals 
and  issued  as  reprints. 

2.  Arrangements  may  be  made  for  the  publica- 
tion of  dissertations  under  the  imprint  of  The 
University  of  Chicago  Press,  upon  the  approval 
of  the  Administrative  Board  of  the  University 


Article  XI 


THE  REGULATIONS 


45 


Press.  Application  should  be  made  through 
the  Director.  In  cases  where  dissertations  are 
accepted  for  publication  in  this  way,  it  should 
be  understood  that  the  author  is  responsible 
for  all  manufacturing  costs,  and  that  such 
editions  as  are  decided  upon  shall  be  placed 
with  the  Publication  Department  of  the  Uni- 
versity Press  on  consignment,  the  same  to  be 
accounted  for  as  sold  at  50  per  cent,  off  the 
net  published  price. 

Section  12. —  Special  regulations  governing  rec- 
ommendation for  higher  degrees  are  as  follows: 

1.  The  Departments  concerned  recommend  to 
the  proper  Faculties,  the  Faculties  to  the  Uni- 
versity Senate,  and  the  Senate  to  the  Board  of 
Trustees. 

2.  In  no  case  is  a  candidate  recommended  for 
a  higher  degree  without  the  consent  of  all  the 
Departments  concerned. 

3.  The  degree  of  Master  (specialist,  and  in  the 
Divinity  School)  is  recommended  only  after 
the  proper  number  of  copies  of  the  dissertation 
have  been  deposited  with  the  Librarian.  (See 
sec.  10,  no.  8.) 

4.  The  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  is 
recommended  only  on  a  written  certificate  of 
the  principal  Department  concerned  that  the 
thesis  is  ready  for  the  printer,  and  on  the  writ- 
ten evidence  of  some  responsible  journal  or 
publisher  that  the  required  number  of  printed 
copies  will  be  furnished  the  University  within  a 
reasonable  time. 

Section  13.  —  At  the  Convocation  at  which  de- 
grees are  conferred  — 

1.  No  name  is  placed  upon  the  program  unless 
the  full  report  of  the  examination  is  in  the 
Recorder's  office. 

2.  Candidates  are  presented  by  their  respective 
Deans  to  the  President  of  the  University,  who 
confers  the  degree  and  presents  the  certificate 
and  diploma. 

3.  For  the  proper  academic  dress,  see  Art.  IV, 
sees.  I  and  2. 


Section  14. —  Four  grades  of  excellence  are  dis- 
tinguished for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philoso- 
phy, namely  :  (i)  7-ite;  (2)  cum  laude ;  (3)  magna 
cum  laude;  (4)  summa  cum  laude.  The  grading 
is  based  both  upon  the  examination  and  the  dis- 
sertation. 

Section  15.  —  Honorary  degrees  (see  sec.  i,  no. 
9)  are  subject  to  the  following  regulations  : 
I.  The  by-law  of  the  Senate  defining  the 
method  of  recommending  for  the  honorary  de- 
gree given  for  scholarship  or  discovery  is  as 
follows  : 

a.  In  order  to  bring  before  the  Senate  a 
name  in  candidacy  for  the  degree  a  written 
proposal,  with  the  signatures  of  not  fewer 
than  five  Senators,  is  filed  with  the  Recorder. 

b.  The  signers  of  this  proposal  support  their 
request  for  its  consideration  by  filing  at  the 
same  time  with  the  Recorder  a  statement  in 
writing,  setting  forth  the  grounds  for  the 
recommendation. 

c.  In  addition  to  the  above  presentation, 
each  instructor  of  rank  not  lower  than  As- 
sistant Professor  in  the  Department  or  De- 
partments in  which  the  work  of  the  nominee 
falls,  indicates  his  estimate  of  the  work  al- 
leged to  merit  the  degree.  This  evidence 
may  be  given  by  signing  the  documents  pro- 
vided for  in  a  and  b,  or  by  separate  state- 
ment in  writing. 

d.  As  soon  as  the  above  evidence  is  in  the 
hands  of  the  Recorder  it  is  the  duty  of  that 
officer  to  notify  the  members  of  the  Senate 
that  at  their  next  meeting  a  recommendation 
for  one  of  the  highest  degrees  is  to  be  pro- 
posed. 

e.  Upon  satisfaction  of  the  requirements  in 
clauses  a-d,  it  is  the  further  duty  of  the  Re- 
corder to  submit  the  case  to  the  Senate  at 
the  meeting  following  the  filing  of  the  com- 
plete evidence,  provided  that  sufficient  time 
shall  have  elapsed  for  suitable  notification  of 
the  members. 

f.  At  least  thirty  days  intervene  between  the 


46 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XII 


Recorder's  notification  that  a  name  is  to  be 
presented  and  the  vote  upon  recommenda- 
tion to  the  Board  of  Trustees. 
g.  For  recommendation  to  the  Board  of 
Trustees,  a  vote  of  four-fifths  of  the  Senators 
present  is  necessary. 

2.  The  by-law  of  the  Senate  defining  the 
method  of  recommendation,  in  the  case  of 
degrees  for  administration,  is  as  follows  : 

a.  The  Senate  considers  proposals  by  not 
fewer  than  ten  of  its  members  under  the  con- 
ditions of  clauses  b,  d,  e,  and  f  preceding. 

b.  For  recommendation  to  the  Board  of 
Trustees  a  four-fifths  vote  of  the  Senators 
present  is  necessary  as  in  the  case  of  candi- 
dates to  be  recommended  for  scholarship  or 
discovery. 

3.  The  number  of  highest  degrees  conferred  in 
any  one  academic  year  may  not  exceed  four. 

4.  In  conferring  the  honorary  degrees  at  the 
Convocation,  the  President  recites  the  specific 
grounds  upon  which  the  degrees  are  conferred. 
Section    16. — Persons    who    have    received    the 

degree  of  Bachelor  of  Divinity  from  the  Baptist 
Union  Theological  Seminary  may,  without  ex- 
amination or  thesis,  receive  the  same  degree  from 
the  University  of  Chicago.  The  applicant  must 
pay  a  diploma  fee  of  $5  and  be  present  in  person 
to  receive  the  degree. 

ARTICLE  XII.     STUDENT  AFFAIRS. 

Section  i. — Student  organizations,  publications 
and  exhibitions  are  in  charge  of  two  Uni- 
versity Boards,  the  Board  of  Physical  Culture 
and  Athletics,  which  has  the  general  supervision 
of  student  athletic  affairs,  and  the  Board  of  Stu- 
dent Organizations,  Publications,  and  Exhibi- 
tions. (For  the  position  and  jurisdiction  of  these 
boards  see  Art.  Ill,  sees.  6  and  7.) 

Section  2. — The  students  of  each  School  or  Col- 
lege elect  certain  of  their  number  to  act  as  a 
Student  Council,  which  serves  as  the  executive 
committee  of  the  student  body  of  that  division. 

I.  The    Student    Councils    include  the  Junior 


Council,  the  Senior  Council,  the  Graduate 
Council,  the  Divinity  Council,  the  Medical 
Council,  the  Law  Council. 

2.  The  Junior  Council  consists  of  members 
elected  from  each  of  the  six  Divisions  of  the 
Junior  Colleges,  the  Council  for  Division  Six 
being  elected  at  the  end  of  the  first  Term. 

3.  The  Senior  Council  consists  of  members 
elected  from  each  of  the  six  Divisions  of  the 
Senior  Colleges. 

4.  The  Medical  Council  consists  of  members 
elected  from  the  first  year  and  second  year 
classes  respectively  of  the  Medical  Courses. 

5.  The  Law  Council  consists  of  members 
elected  from  each  of  the  classes  of  the  Law 
School. 

6.  The  Graduate  Council  consists  of  seven  mem- 
bers, four  from  the  Graduate  School  of  Arts 
and  Literature,  and  three  from  the  Ogden  (Grad- 
uate) School  of  Science. 

7.  The  Divinity  Council  consists  of  the  offi- 
cers of  the  Students'  Association,  viz.  :  the 
President,  Vice-President,  Secretary,  and  Treas- 
urer, and  of  the  chairmen  of  the  regular  com- 
mittees, viz.:  of  the  Committees  on  Finance, 
Missions,  Athletics,  Social  Life,  Public  Speak- 
ing, Public  Devotion. 

Section  3. — A  student  properly  elected  to  mem- 
bership in  a  College  Council  holds  office  for  two 
consecutive  Quarters. 

1.  He  is  eligible  under  the  rules  for  the  public 
appearance  of  students.     (See  sees.  7  and  8.) 

2.  His  election  is  approved  by  the  Faculty  of 
his  College. 

3.  He  is  present  at  the  meeting  at  which  the 
election  takes  place. 

4.  The  Councilor  elected  for  Junior  Division 
one  (i)  serves  on  the  Senior  Council  during 
his  second  Quarter  of  office,  provided  that  he 
secures  his  title  of  Associate  at  the  end  of  his 
first  Quarter  in  office.  The  members  of  the 
Council,  with  the  members  who  hold  over 
from  the  preceding  Quarter,  report  on  the  day 


Article  XII 


THE  REGULATIONS 


47 


of  election  to  the  President  to  receive  official 
instructions. 

Section  4. — The  members  of  the  Graduate  Coun- 
cil are  constituted  in  the  following  manner : 

1.  For  the  purpose  of  the  election  of  Graduate 
Councilors,  the  Graduate  Schools  are  divided 
into  the  Graduate  School  of  Arts  and  Literature 
and  the  Ogden  (Graduate)  School  of  Science. 

2.  The  Graduate  Council  consists  of  seven  (7) 
members,  four  (4)  to  be  elected  from  the  Grad- 
uate School  of  Arts  and  Literature,  and  three  (3) 
from  the  Ogden  (Graduate)  School  of  Science. 

3.  The  Graduate  School  of  Arts  and  Literature 
is  divided  into  four  groups,  (i)  The  Ancient- 
Language  Group,  including  the  following 
Departments  :  Latin,  Greek,  Sanskrit  and  Com- 
parative Indo-European  Philology,  the  History 
of  Art,  Biblical  and  Patristic  Greek,  Semitic 
Languages  and  Literatures.  (2)  The  Modern- 
Language  Group,  including  the  following  De- 
partments :  English,  Romance,  Germanic, 
Oriental  Languages.  (3)  The  Philosophical 
Group,  including  the  following  Departments  : 
Philosophy,  Sociology  and  Anthropology.  (4) 
The  Historical  Group,  including  the  following 
Departments  :  Political  Economy,  Political  Sci- 
ence, History.  Each  group  shall  be  entitled  to 
elect  one  councilor. 

4.  The  Ogden  (Graduate)  School  of  Science 
is  divided  into  three  groups,  (i)  The  Physi- 
cal-Science Group,  including  the  follow- 
ing Departments  :  Mathematics,  Astronomy, 
Physics,  Chemistry.  (2)  The  Medical-Science 
Group,  including  the  following  Departments : 
Anatomy,  Physiology  (including  Physiological 
Chemistry  and  Pharmacology),  Neurology, 
Pathology  and  Bacteriology.  (3)  The  Biology- 
and-Earth-Science  Group,  including  the  follow- 
ing Departments  :  Geology,  Geography,  Zool- 
ogy, Palaeontology,  Botany.  Each  group  shall 
be  entitled  to  elect  one  councilor. 

5.  A  graduate  student  belongs  only  to  that 
group  in  which  he  has  chosen  his  Major  De- 
partment. 


6.  Elections  are  held  at  the  third  graduate 
chapel-assembly  of  the  Autumn  Quarter. 

7.  All  nominations  of  candidates  for  the  Coun- 
cil are  made  by  petition.  Any  petition  signed 
by  as  many  as  ten  members  of  a  group  nomi- 
nates its  candidate.  The  petition  is  sent  to  the 
Graduate  Council  through  the  Faculty  Ex- 
change at  least  three  days  prior  to  the  election. 
All  nominations  thus  made  are  transmitted  by 
the  Council  to  the  councilor  representing  the 
group  making  the  nomination,  and  it  is  his  duty 
to  announce  the  nomination  by  posting  the 
names  on  a  bulletin  board  convenient  to  his 
group.  The  names  are  posted  and  published 
at  least  two  days  prior  to  the  election. 

8.  At  all  meetings  of  a  group  for  purposes  of 
election  its  councilor  presides.  In  his  absence 
a  temporary  chairman  from  among  the  Fellows 
of  the  group  is  provided  by  the  Council. 

9.  The  officer  presiding  over  an  election  pre- 
sents the  names  of  the  nominees  to  the  group. 
Election  of  councilor  is  by  ballot. 

10.  The  term  of  office  of  a  councilor  is  one  year. 

11.  Any  vacancy  occurring  in  the  representation 
of  a  group  is  filled  for  the  unexpired  term  in 
the  same  manner  as  in  a  regular  election. 

13.  The  Council  elects  from  among  its  mem- 
bers a  chairman  and  a  secretary.  The  one  is 
from  the  Science  Division,  the  other  from  the 
Arts  and  Literature  Division,  and  they  alternate 
from  year  to  year. 

13.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  Council  to  initiate 
investigations  and  make  recommendations  in 
regard  to  matters  affecting  the  welfare  of  the 
Graduate  Schools. 

14.  All  questions,  suggestions,  or  complaints 
by  graduate  students,  either  collectively  or  in- 
vidually,  in  regard  to  the  Graduate  Schools 
(except  such  as  may  be  of  a  personal  nature), 
are  first  submitted  to  the  Graduate  Council. 
The  Council  considers  such  matters  and  pre- 
sents them  to  the  proper  authorities  with 
such  recommendations  as  it  may  deem  ad- 
visable. 


48 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XII 


15.  The  Chairman  of  the  Graduate  Coun- 
cil, promptly  after  each  election,  transmits 
to  the  Recorder  the  name  of  the  Councilor 
elected. 

Sections. —  Members  of  the  Divinity  Council 
are  constituted  by  election  in  the  Students'  Asso- 
ciation of  the  Divinity  School,  as  provided  in  its 
by-laws. 

Section  6.- — The  Student  Councils  serve  as  the 
Executive  Committees  of  their  respective  Schools 
and  Colleges,  with  these  duties,  viz.: 

1.  To  hold  weekly  meetings  at  such  places  and 
times  as  each  Council  may  determine.  (For 
extra  absences  allowed  to  College  Councilors 
for   this    purpose,   see  Art.    IX,  sec.   3,  no.  7.) 

2.  To  consider  and  present  to  the  Faculties 
communications  from  the  student  body;  to 
consider  and  report  recommendations  on  such 
general  questions  of  conduct  as  may  be  sub- 
mitted to  them  ;  to  consider  and  present  to 
the  student  body  communications  from  the 
Faculties. 

3.  To  assume  the  responsibility  for  the  con- 
duct of  certain  holidays  and  public  exercises. 

4.  To  nominate  marshals  from  the  candidates 
for  degrees. 

5.  To  be  present  officially  for  special  duty  at 
each  Convocation ;  at  any  official  reception 
given  to  the  student  body,  of  which  the  Coun- 
cil is  a  representative,  and  upon  Convocation 
Sunday.  Their  names  are  printed  on  the 
Convocation  program. 

Section  7.— The  regulations  regarding  the  pub- 
lic appearance  of  students  relate  to  debates,  con- 
tests in  oratory  and  declamation  in  intercollegiate 
contests,  musical  concerts,  dramatic  exhibitions, 
athletic  games  and  contests,  in  which  students 
appear  as  representatives  of  the  University. 

1.  Playing  upon  second  teams  on  the  University 
grounds  is  not  regarded  as  a  public  appearance. 

2.  Participation  in  the  impromptu  athletic  con- 
tests held  on  Marshall  Field  on  the  morning  of 
Junior  Day  is  not  regarded  as  a  public  appear- 
ance. 


3.  The  holding  of  an  elective  or  an  appointive 
office  in  connection  with  the  Junior   Day  exer- 
cises is  regarded  as  a  public  appearance. 
Section  8. — The  general  rules  governing  eligi- 
bility to  public  appearance  are  as  follows  : 

1.  During  the  Quarter  in  which  the  student 
takes  part  in  any  public  exhibition,  or  any 
intercollegiate  athletic  contest,  or  serves  on  the 
editorial  board  of  any  student  publication,  the 
student  is  taking  full  work,  which  is  sustained 
at  a  satisfactory  grade. 

a.  For  the  definition  of  "full  work"  see  Art. 
VIII,  sec.  3. 

b.  A  satisfactory  grade  means  a  passing  mark 
in  all  the  courses  for  which  the  student  is 
registered. 

c.  Incomplete  courses  not  satisfactorily  com- 
pleted by  the  end  of  the  first  six  subsequent 
weeks  of  residence  count  from  that  date  as 
conditions.  This  ruling  does  not  apply  to 
the  mark  "incomplete"  in  English  i,  in  the 
case  of  students  registered  for  English  2. 

d.  If  three  courses  are  undertaken  by  a 
student,  they  are  pursued  for  at  least  six 
weeks.  Otherwise  the  student  is  not  regarded 
as  having  done  full  work  that  Quarter. 

6.  Students  may  withdraw  from  a  course  in 
a  regular  way  at  any  time  during  the  Quar- 
ter. Such  withdrawal  at  or  before  the  end 
of  the  first  Term  does  not  count  as  a  failure, 
but  withdrawal  at  any  time  during  the  sec- 
ond Term  from  a  course  not  maintained 
satisfactorily  disqualifies  the  student  for  pub- 
lic appearance  during  the  two  subsequent 
Quarters  of  residence,  unless  the  incomplete 
work  is  in  the  meantime  made  up. 

2.  The  student  has  completed  the  full  work  of 
the  two  preceding  Quarters  of  his  residence, 
and  his  absences  during  that  period  have  not 
been  sufficiently  numerous  to  reduce  his  cred- 
its; but  less  than  full  work  in  a  fourth  Quarter 
of  residence,  after  three  consecutive  Quarters 
of  full  work,  does  not  disqualify  a  student. 

3.  A  student  guilty  of   ungentlemanly  conduct 


Article  XII 


THE  REGULATIONS 


49 


is  disqualified  from  public  appearance  for  such 
time  as  the  proper  Administrative  Board  shall 
determine. 

4.  Eligibility  for  membership  in  any  athletic 
team  or  musical  or  dramatic  club  implies  eligi- 
bility to  any  office  or  honor  within  the  gift  of 
the  team  or  club. 

Section  9. — Unclassified  students  having  admis- 
sion and  college  credits  amounting  to  thirteen 
units  are  eligible  to  undergraduate  contests  and 
public  exhibitions,  excepting  University  prize 
contests,  on  the  same  conditions  as  other  under- 
graduate students.  Unclassified  students  who  do 
not  have  credit  to  the  amount  of  thirteen  units 
are  not  eligible  to  any  intercollegiate  contest  or 
public  exhibition,  as  above  defined,  until  after  a 
residence  of  one  Quarter  at  the  University,  during 
which  time  the  work  has  been  satisfactorily  com- 
pleted. 

Section  10. — Students  otherwise  eligible  for  ap- 
pearance in  Public  Speaking  are  subject  to  the 
following  regulations  : 

1.  No  professional  teacher  of  elocution  is  eli- 
gible to  participate  in  a  contest  in  declamation 
or  oratory  or  debate,  the  term  "  professional " 
being  understood  to  mean  one  who  is  accus- 
tomed to  give  public  exhibitions  for  a  money 
consideration. 

2.  A  successful  competitor  in  oratory  or  decla- 
mation in  any  of  the  final  contests  of  any  School 
or  College  is  not  permitted  again  to  compete  in 
that  particular  School  or  College. 

3.  The  winner  in  any  preliminary  contest  may, 
if  he  does  not  win  in  a  final  contest,  compete  in 
subsequent  preliminary  contests,  upon  the  con- 
dition that,  if  he  be  awarded  first  place  in  such 
subsequent  contest  he  may  again  enter  the  final 
contest;  but  the  preliminary  prize  is  awarded 
to  the  student  whose  rank  shall  be  second  to  his. 
Section  11. — Students  otherwise  eligible  for  ap- 
pearance in  athletic  exhibitions  are  subject  to  the 
following  regulations  : 

I.  A  College  student  who  i^a)  has  played  in  any 
intercollegiate  game  as  a  member  of  any  other 


college;  and  (^)  has  not  been  a  matriculate  of 
the  University  for  at  least  a  year,  nor  obtained 
a  College  degree  meanwhile,  is  debarred. 

2.  A  student  who  has  been  debarred  for  infrac- 
tion of  other  University  regulations  (see  Art. 
IX,  sees.  5-9)  is  debarred. 

3.  A  student  who  has  played  four  years  on  the 
University  teams  is  debarred.  (Participation 
in  any  part  of  any  intercollegiate  contest  is  con- 
sidered as  "playing"  for  that  year.) 

4.  A  student  who  has  used  his  knowledge  of, 
or  skill  in,  athletics  for  gain,  or  receives  gifts, 
remuneration,  or  pay  for  his  services  on  Univer- 
sity teams,  is  debarred. 

5.  A  student  who  receives  from  the  University 
compensation  for  services  rendered  by  way  of 
regular  instruction,  is  debarred. 

6.  A  student  on  a  University  team,  when  in  at- 
tendance less  than  one-half  of  the  University 
year,  is  debarred  from  succeeding  intercollegiate 
contests  until  his  term  of  residence  has  reached 
six  consecutive  calendar  months. 

7.  Unclassified  students  accepted  as  candidates 
for  athletic  teams  are  subject  to  the  rules  re- 
quiring attendance  which  govern  candidates  for 
a  degree.     (See  Art.  VIII,  sec.  11.) 

8.  All  candidates  for  University  teams  subscribe 
to  the  following  declaration  : 

I, of  the class  in  the  University  of 

Chicago,  hereby  declare  that  I  am  a  bona  fide  student 
and  an  amateur,  and  eligible  in  all  other  respects,  ac- 
cording to  the  letter  and  spirit  of  the  foregoing  rules. 

Signed  in  my  presence, ,  190—. 

9.  Before  an  intercollegiate  contest  is  held,  the 
Director  submits  to  the  chairman  of  the  Ath- 
letic Committee  of  the  competing  college  a 
certified  list  of  eligible  players.  The  captain 
of  the  team  excludes  from  the  team  all  save 
those  so  certified. 

10.  No  member  of  any  University  team   com- 
petes  in   any  contest  under  an  assumed  name, 
or  as  the  member  of  any  other  organization. 
Section  12. — Intercollegiate  games  are   played 

nnder  direct  student  or  college  management,  and 


50 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XII 


not  under  the  control  of  any  private  individual  or 
of  any  corporation  or  association. 

Section  13.— University  teams  play  only  with 
teams  representing  educational  institutions. 

Section  14. — University  sports  on  Memorial 
Day  are  forbidden. 

Section  15. — The  method  of  determining  eligi- 
bility in  the  matter  of  class  standing  during  the 
season  of  the  activity  of  any  athletic,  musical,  or 
dramatic  organization  or  student  publication  is  as 
follows : 

1.  The  Quarter  is  divided  into  four  periods  of 
three  weeks  each. 

2.  At  the  end  of  each  period  instructors  report 
on  the  names  of  members  of  these  organizations. 

3.  The  report  is  the  student's  class  record,  up  to 
date,  in  the  usual  form,  that  is,  "A,"  "B,"  "C," 
"D,"  or  "  E."  Marks  are  in  no  case  to  be 
changed  after  they  have  been  officially  reported. 

4.  Students  who  maintain  a  grade  of  "C"  or 
above  in  each  course,  up  to  the  date  of  report, 
are  entitled  to  appear  during  the  next  succeed- 
ing period. 

5.  A  student  who  falls  below  "C"  in  any 
course,  up  to  the  date  of  report,  is  disqualified 
from  appearing  during  the  next  succeeding 
period. 

6.  In  the  case  of  athletics,  the  Director  of  the 
Division  of  Physical  Culture  at  appointed 
times  sends  to  the  Deans  concerned  a  list  of 
all  those  who  are  likely  to  be  members  of  any 
University  athletic  team. 

7.  The  Director  of  the  Division  of  Physical 
Culture  presents  reports  of  students  deficient 
in  their  work  at  meetings  of  the  Board  of 
Physical  Culture  during  the  season  when  inter- 
collegiate contests  are  being  held.  (See  Art. 
IX,  sec.  6,  no.  i.) 

Section  16.— The  regulations  for  the  organiza- 
tion and  management  of  the  musical  clubs  are  as 
follows : 

I.  Organization. — There  are  two  sections    of 

the   combined   clubs,  vocal  and   instrumental. 

There    are    a    President,    Manager,    Assistant 


Manager,  and  Advisory  Committee  of  the  com- 
bined clubs.  Each  section  has  a  Leader, 
Secretary,  Librarian,  and  Membership  Commit- 
tee. The  Membership  Committee  for  each  sec- 
tion consists  of  the  Leader,  one  member 
elected  by  the  section,  and  one  member  of  the 
Faculty  appointed  by  the  Board  of  Student  Or- 
ganizations. The  Advisory  Committee  of  the 
combined  clubs  consists  of  the  President 
and  Manager  of  the  combined  clubs,  the  Mem- 
bership Committee  of  each  section,  and  the 
Director  of  Music.  This  committee  has 
general  oversight  of  all  the  affairs  of  the  Club. 
All  important  matters,  such  as  date  of  Chicago 
concerts,  and  trip  dates  are  submitted  to  the 
Board  of  Student  Organizations.  The  As- 
sistant Manager  is  below  his  Senior  year  and 
not  in  the  same  section  with  the  Manager. 

2.  Membership. — Members  are  chosen  by  the 
Membership  Committee  of  each  section,  at 
trials  open  to  students  in  any  Division  of 
the  University.  Each  member  deposits  with 
the  Manager  the  sum  of  §5,  which  may  be 
drawn  against  for  fines  for  failure  to  perform 
duty.  Fines  may  be  imposed  by  the  President 
of  the  Club,  on  the  recommendation  of  the 
Leader  of  the  sections  of  the  Club  and  the 
Director  of  Music. 

3.  Management  —  finances. — Each  member  de- 
posits ?5  with  the  Manager.  The  Manager 
deposits  one-half  of  this  sum  with  the  Univer- 
sity Registrar  until  the  close  of  the  season, 
when  it  may  be  withdrawn  to  meet  deficit  or  be 
returned  to  the  members.  The  Manager 
renders  an  itemized  statement  to  the  Advisory 
Committee  upon  request  of  that  committee. 
No  member  or  officer  receives  any  remunera- 
tion whatever  for  work  done  on  or  for  the 
Club.  Any  deficit  at  the  close  of  the  season 
is  made  good  by  the  members.  Any  surplus 
is  deposited  with  the  University  Registrar  as  a 
Glee  Club  sinking  fund. 

4.  Season  and  concerts.  —  Concerts  which  do 
not  necessitate  absence  from  recitation  may  be 


Article  XII 


THE  REGULATIONS 


SI 


given  by  either  section  of  the  Club  or  by  the 
combined  clubs  during  the  season  from  Thanks- 
giving until  the  June  Convocation.  A  trip 
lasting  two  weeks  may  be  taken  during  the 
Christmas  recess  and  a  trip  lasting  one  week 
during  the  Spring  recess. 

Section  17. —  The  Declamation  Contests  are  open 
to  members  of  the  Junior  Colleges  who  have  less 
than  eighteen  Majors  credit  in  any  of  the  Col- 
leges, and  who  are  eligible  for  public  appearance. 
They  are  held  during  the  Autumn  and  Winter 
Quarters,  under  the  rules  hereby  prescribed : 

1.  A  contestant  registers  his  name,  the  title  of 
selection,  and  the  name  of  its  author,  with  the 
Dean  of  the  Junior  Colleges,  before  Monday 
noon  of  the  sixth  week  of  the  Quarter.  Selec- 
tions must  be  in  prose,  and  limited  to  800  words. 

2.  The  preliminaries  are  held  on  Wednesday 
and  Thursday  of  the  sixth  week  of  the  Quarter. 
Each  speaker  has  two  minutes  in  which  to  pre- 
sent any  portion  of  his  declamation. 

3.  The  members  of  the  Faculty  in  the  Depart- 
ment of  Public  Speaking  act  as  judges.  Five 
men  and  five  women  from  the  Lower  Juniors 
and  five  men  and  five  women  from  the  Upper 
Juniors  are  chosen  to  speak  at  the  Semi-Finals. 

4.  The  Semi-Finals  are  held  on  Wednesday  and 
Thursday  of  the  eighth  week  of  the  Quarter. 
Each  speaker  then  presents  his  entire  selection. 

5.  The  members  of  the  Faculty  in  the  Depart- 
ment of  Public  Speaking  act  as  judges. 

6.  One  man  and  one  woman  from  the  Lower 
Juniors  and  one  man  and  one  woman  from  the 
Upper  Juniors  are  chosen  to  speak  at  the  Finals. 
To  each  is  awarded  a  Scholarship  for  one 
Quarter. 

7.  The  Finals  are  held  at  the  last  Division 
Meeting  of  the  Quarter. 

8.  Members  of  the  Junior  College  Faculty  act 
as  judges. 

9.  The  man  and   the  woman   winning  in   the 
Finals  share  equally  a  cash  prize  of  ^50. 
Section  18. — The  Annual  Freshman-Sophomore 

Debate  is  open  to  all  members  of  the  Junior  Col- 


leges who  have  less  than  eighteen  Majors  credit 
in  any  of  the  colleges.  It  is  held  during  the 
Spring  Quarter  of  each  year,  under  the  rules 
hereby  prescribed: 

1.  The  question  for  discussion  is  chosen  by  the 
Freshman  and  Sophomore  debating  clubs,  and 
is  announced  at  the  last  Division  Meeting  of 
the  Winter  Quarter. 

2.  Contestants  register  with  the  Dean  of  the 
Junior  Colleges,  before  Monday  noon  of  the 
second  week  of  the  Spring  Quarter. 

3.  The  Department  of  Public  Speaking  and  the 
Department  of  English  choose  jointly  a  com- 
mittee of  three  to  act  as  judges. 

4.  The  Preliminary  debates  are  held  on  Wed- 
nesday and  Thursday  evenings  of  the  third 
week  of  the  Quarter. 

5.  Contestants  speak  on  either  side  of  the 
question,  and  each  has  five  minutes  for  presen- 
tation of  case,  and  three  minutes  for  rebuttal. 

6.  From  each  class,  six  speakers  are  chosen  for 
the  Semi-Finals. 

7.  As  soon  as  the  speakers  for  the  Semi-Finals 
are  selected,  they  determine  by  lot  the  side  of 
the  question  which  each  will  take,  and  the 
order  of  speaking. 

8.  Three  judges  are  provided  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  Public  Speaking  and  the  Department 
of  English. 

9.  The  Semi-Finals  are  held  on  Wednesday  and 
Thursday  evenings  of  the  fifth  week  of  the 
Quarter. 

10.  Each  speaker  has  eight  minutes  for  presen- 
tation of  case,  and  three  minutes  for  rebuttal. 

11.  From  each  class,  the  best  three  individual 
debaters  are  chosen  to  speak  in  the  Final  De- 
bate. These  speakers  immediately  draw  lots 
for  sides  of  question  in  the  Finals. 

12.  The  Freshman-Sophomore  Final  Debate  is 
held  on  Thursday  evening  of  the  tenth  week  of 
the  Quarter. 

13.  The  board  of  judges  consists  of  five  mem- 
bers chosen  from  the  Departments  of  Philos- 
ophy, Political  Economy,  Political  Science,  His- 


52 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XII 


tory,  Sociology,  English,  and  Public  Speaking. 
Only  one  is  chosen  from  any  one  Department. 

14.  Each  speaker  has  twelve  minutes  for  pre- 
sentation of  case,  and  five  minutes  for  rebuttal. 
The  negative  leads  in  rebuttal. 

15.  To  each  member  of   the   winning   side   is 
awarded  a  Scholarship  for  one  Quarter. 
Section  19. —  The  Annual  Contest  in  Oratory  is 

open  to  all  members  of  the  University  who  have 
never  taken  an  academic  degree  and  who  have 
not  done  more  than  four  years  of  college  work. 
It  is  held  during  the  Winter  Quarter  of  each  year, 
under  the  rules  hereby  prescribed: 

1.  Contestants  register  with  the  Dean  of  the 
Senior  Colleges,  before  Thursday  noon  of  the 
second  week  of  the  Winter  Quarter. 

2.  The  completed  oration  does  not  exceed 
2,000  words.  Three  typewritten  copies,  signed 
with  a  fictitious  name,  and  accompanied  by 
the  real  name  of  the  author  inclosed  in  a  sealed 
envelope,  are  left  with  the  Dean  of  the  Senior 
Colleges  before  Thursday  noon  of  the  third 
week  of  the  Winter  Quarter. 

3.  The  manuscripts  are  submitted  to  a  com- 
mittee of  three,  chosen  jointly  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  Public  Speaking  and  the  Department 
of  English.  Each  judge  grades  the  orations  on 
the  scale  of  too,  and  reports  in  writing  to  the 
Dean  of  the  Senior  Colleges  before  Wednesday 
noon  of  the  fourth  week  of  the  Winter  Quarter. 
The  next  day  announcement  is  made  of  the  ten 
orations  to  be  delivered  at  the  Semi-Finals. 

4.  The  Semi-Finals  are  held  on  Thursday  after- 
noon of  the  sixth  week  of  the  Winter  Quarter. 
The  Department  of  Public  Speaking  and  the 
Department  of  English  choose  jointly  a  com- 
mittee of  three  to  act  as  judges.  Each  judge 
grades  the  speakers  on  the  scale  of  100,  deliv- 
ery alone  being  considered.  On  the  basis  of 
rank  in  the  Preliminaries  and  in  the  Semi- 
Finals  combined,  the  judges  select  six  speakers 
to  appear  in  the  Finals. 

5.  The  Finals  are  held  on  Thursday  evening  of 
the  eighth  week  of  the  Winter  Quarter. 


6.  The  Department  of  Public  Speaking  and  the 
Department  of  English  choose  jointly  a  com- 
mittee of  five  to  act  as  judges.  Each  judge 
grades  the  orations  on  the  scale  of  100,  both 
matter  and  manner  being  considered.  The 
speaker  having  the  highest  rank  represents  the 
University  in  inter-collegiate  oratory,  and 
receives  a  prize  of  S50  cash  and  a  Scholarship 
for  one  year.  The  speaker  second  in  rank  acts 
as  alternate,  and  receives  a  prize  of  $25  cash 
and  a  Scholarship  for  two  Quarters.  The 
speaker  third  in  rank  receives  a  Scholarship  for 
one  Quarter. 

Section  20. — The  Annual  University  Debate  is 
open  to  all  students  of  the  University  who  are 
eligible  for  public  appearance.  It  is  held  during 
the  Autumn  Quarter  of  each  year,  under  the  rules 
hereby  prescribed : 

1.  For  each  Preliminary,  three  judges  are  chosen 
from  the  Faculties  of  the  respective  Schools  or 
Colleges. 

2.  The  Preliminaries  are  held  on  Thursday 
evening  of  the  fifth  week  of  the  Autumn  Quarter. 

3.  For  the  Preliminaries,  the  members  of  the 
Graduate  Schools  and  of  the  Divinity  School 
constitute  a  First  Group,  members  of  the  Law 
School  and  the  Medical  Course  Students  a 
Second  Group,  and  members  of  the  Colleges  a 
Third  Group. 

4.  From  each  Group  six  speakers  are  chosen  to 
appear  in  the  Semi-Finals. 

5.  Contestants  may  speak  on  either  side  of  the 
question  and  are  judged  on  their  ability  as 
individual  speakers. 

6.  Each  speaker  has  five  minutes  for  presenta- 
tion of  case  and  three  minutes  for  rebuttal. 

7.  The  Semi-Finals  are  held  on  Wednesday 
and  Thursday  evenings  of  the  sixth  week  of  the 
Autumn  Quarter. 

8.  At  the  first  Semi-Final  the  representatives  of 
the  First  Group  and  of  the  Second  Group  debate. 
From  these  are  selected  the  best  six  individual 
debaters,  who  debate  on  the  succeeding  night 
with  the  representatives  of  the  Third   Group. 


Article  XII 


THE  REG  ULA  TIONS 


S3 


On  this  second  occasion  six  speakers  are  chosen 
to  appear  in  the  Finals. 

9.  Each  speaker  has  five  minutes  for  presenta- 
tion of  case,  and  three  minutes  for  rebuttal. 

10.  The  board  of  judges  for  the  Semi-Finals  and 
the  Finals  consists  of  five  members  chosen  from 
the  Departments  of  Philosophy,  Political 
Economy,  Political  Science,  History,  Sociology, 
English,  and  Public  Speaking.  Only  one  is 
chosen  from  any  one  Department. 

11.  As  soon  as  the  speakers  for  the  Finals  are 
chosen,  they  determine  by  lot  the  side  of  the 
question  upon  which  they  are  to  debate,  and 
the  order  of  speaking. 

12.  The  Finals  are  held  on  Thursday  evening  of 
the  tenth  week  of  the  Autumn  Quarter. 

13.  At  the  Finals  each  speaker  has  twelve  min- 
utes for  the  first  speech  and  five  minutes  for 
rebuttal.  The  first  rebuttal  speech  is  given  by 
the  negative. 

14.  At  the  Finals  the  judges  choose  the  best 
three  speakers,  who  represent  the  University  in 
the  annual  intercollegiate  debate.  To  each  of 
these  is  given  a  cash  prize  of  $50  and  a  Scholar- 
ship for  one  year.  The  other  three  speakers 
act  as  alternates  for  the  intercollegiate  debate, 
and  each  receives  a  Scholarship  for  one  Quarter. 
In  case  an  alternate  takes  the  place  of  a  prin- 
cipal speaker  at  the  intercollegiate  debate  there 
is  an  exchange  of  Scholarships. 

15.  The  question  for  debate  is  that  chosen  for 
the  inter-collegiate  contest.  This  is  announced 
during  the  Spring  Quarter  preceding  the  annual 
debate. 

16.  All  contests  in  debate,  oratory,  and  decla- 
mation are  under  the  joint  supervision  of  the 
Department  of  Public  Speaking  and  the  Depart- 
ment of  English. 

17.  The  Student  Councils  of  the  respective 
Schools  and  Colleges  arrange  for  the  manage- 
ment of  the  details  of  the  contests. 

i8.  Winners  of  the  first  prizes,  or  an  alternate 
who  takes  the  place  of  a  debater  in  an  inter- 


collegiate debate,  do  not  again  participate  in 
the  annual  debate. 

Section  21. — The  following  records  of  contests 
in  Public  Speaking  are  kept : 

1.  A  record  of  the  Annual  University  debate 
by  the  secretaries  of  the  respective  Councils. 
These  records  contain  a  list  of  successful  con- 
testants, with  their  respective  grades. 

2.  A  record  by  the  University  Recorder  of  the 
successful  contestants  in  oratory  and  debate, 
and  of  successful  representatives  of  the  Uni- 
versity in  intercollegiate  contests. 

Section  22. — An  organization  of  students  de- 
siring recognition  by  the  University  files  with  the 
Administrative  Board  of  Student  Organizations, 
etc.,  (a)  its  name;  (h)  a  list  of  members;  (c)  such 
statements  of  purposes  and  methods  as  may  be 
required. 

Section  23. — An  organization  when  recognized 
appoints  a  representative,  who  is  the  official  me- 
dium of  communication  with  the  University 
authorities. 

Section  24. — Among  Junior  College  and  Un- 
classified students,  membership  in  secret  organi- 
zations is  limited  to  those  who  have  finished  at 
least  three  Majors  of  work  in  residence  at  the 
University. 

Section  25. — -An  organization  disapproved  by 
the  Administrative  Board  of  Student  Organiza- 
tions, etc.,  ceases  to  exist.  The  Board  at  any 
time  has  the  right  to  disapprove  of  any  existing 
or  proposed  organization. 

Section  26. —  Organizations  of  students  occupy- 
ing distinct  buildings  or  rooms  as  residence, 
whether  in  the  Quadrangles  or  outside  them,  are 
recognized  as  University  Houses,  under  the  gen- 
eral rules  governing  Houses,  as  follows  : 

1.  Members  of  the  University  entitled  to  con- 
tinuous residence  in  a  particular  Hall  of  the  Uni- 
versity in  the  Quadrangles  constitute  a  House. 

2.  Every  group  of  six  or  more  students  living 
together  as  an  organization   outside  the  Quad- 


54 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XII 


rangles  constitutes  a  House,  and  is  subject  to 
the  general  rules  of  Houses,  with  such  modi- 
fications of  such  rules  in  each  case  as  may  be 
determined  by  the  Administrative  Board  of 
Student  Organizations,  etc.  Such  Houses  are 
assigned  to  new  Halls  in  the  Quadrangles  in  the 
order  of  application. 

3.  No  House  is  allowed  to  retain  a  room  in  the 
University  buildings  for  more  than  one  Quarter 
unless  it  has  a  membership  of  at  least  thirty-six. 

4.  Each  House  has  a  Head  appointed  by  the 
President  of  the  University ;  a  Counselor  chosen 
from  the  Faculty  of  the  University  by  the  mem- 
bers of  the  House;  a  House  Committee  elected 
by  the  members  of  the  House,  of  which  House 
Committee  the  Head  of  the  House  is  chairman 
and  the  Counselor  a  member  ex  officio ;  and  a 
Secretary  and  Treasurer,  elected  by  the  mem- 
bers of  the  House. 

5.  Each  House  through  its  committee  makes  a 
quarterly  report  to  the  President  of  the  Uni- 
versity. 

6.  A  House  may  select,  with  the  approval  of 
the  Board  of  Student  Organizations,  one  or 
more  persons  not  directly  connected  with  the 
University,  as  patrons  or  patronesses. 

7.  Where  the  Head  of  a  House  is  a  member  of 
the  Faculties  and  the  House  has  no  Counselor, 
the  Head  of  the  House  acts  as  Counselor  also. 

8.  The  Head  of  a  House  reports  promptly  to 
the  examining  physician  cases  of  sickness  or 
injuries  in  the  House. 

9.  Eligibility  to  membership  in  a  House  is  sub- 
ject to  such  restrictions  as  may  be  required  by 
the  Administrative  Board  of  Student  Organiza- 
tions, etc. 

10.  Residence  in  a  Hall  is  limited  to  students 
in  attendance  on  courses  in  the  University,  and 
to  officers  of  the  University.  But  no  officer  of 
the  University  is  entitled  to  residence  in  a  Uni- 
versity House  without  the  permission  of  the 
Head  of  the  House. 

11.  The  privilege  of  membership  in  a  House 
may  be  withdrawn  by  the   Board    of    Student 


Organizations  on  the  recommendation  of  the 
Head  and  Counselor. 

12.  In  case  of  vacancy  in  a  Hall  the  Registrar 
assigns  applicants  to  rooms  in  the  order  of  ap- 
plication. Students  thus  assigned  are  consid- 
ered guests,  and  if  these  guests  are  not  elected 
to  membership  during  the  first  Quarter  of  resi- 
dence they  have  no  further  claim  upon  the  rooms 
occupied.  The  room  rents  are  fixed  and  col- 
lected by  the  University. 

13.  The  Registrar  gives  precedence  in  assign- 
ing rooms  in  the  Women's  Houses  to  past  mem- 
bers intending  to  return  to  the  University. 

14.  Each  House  is  governed  by  a  body  of  rules, 
adopted  by  a  two-thirds  vote  of  members  of 
the  House,  and  approved  by  the  Board  of  Stu- 
dent Organizations. 

15.  All  residents  in  the  House,  whether  mem- 
bers or  guests,  are  understood  to  be  subject  to 
the  general  House  requirements. 

16.  Houses  may  not  levy  assessments  upon  mem- 
bers, but  may  request  voluntary  contributions. 

Section  27. — Special  regulations  governing  stu- 
dent organizations  are  as  follows  : 

1.  Social  functions  conducted  under  the  aus- 
pices of  students  or  student  organizations  are 
held  on  Friday  or  Saturday  evening,  or  on  the 
evening  preceding  a  holiday,  and  close  at  an 
hour  not  later  than  i  a.  m. 

2.  A  schedule  of  all  House  and  society  enter- 
tainments for  a  given  Quarter  is  prepared  on  or 
before  the  tenth  day  of  the  Quarter,  to  be  ap- 
proved by  the  President  and  the  Dean  of 
Women. 

3.  In  all  lists  of  students  taking  part  in  enter- 
tainments given  by  student  organizations  there 
is  discrimination  between  those  students  who  are 
actually  in  residence  and  former  students,  and 
the  distinction  must  be  clearly  indicated. 

Section  28. — Student  publications  are  subject  to 
the  following  regulations  : 

I.  Every  publication  conducted  on  the  respon- 
sibility of  the  students  has  printed  in  a  conspic- 


Article  XIII 


THE  REGULATIONS 


55 


uous  place  the  statement  that  it  is  not  an  official 
publication  of  the  University. 

2.  Every  student  actively  connected  with  a  stu- 
dent publication  files  with  the  Dean  of  the  Fac- 
ulties a  statement  setting  forth  the  nature  of  the 
publication  and  his  connection  with  it. 

3.  A  file  of  each  student  publication  is  depos- 
ited with  the  Librarian. 

4.  Editors  of  student  publications  hold  their 
places  subject  to  the  rules  for  public  appear- 
ance (see  sec.  8)  and  to  the  method  established 
for  enforcing  them  (see  sec.  15). 

Section  29.  —  The  regulation  governing  the  con- 
ferring of  the  University  "C"  is  as  follows: 
The  University  "C"  is  given  upon  the  recom- 
mendation of  the  Director  of  Physical  Culture, 
approved  by  the  Board  of  Physical  Culture  and 
Athletics. 

ARTICLE  XIII.     FISCAL  MATTERS. 

Section  I. — The  Board  of  Trustees  of  the  Uni- 
versity is  the  final  authority  in  all  fiscal  matters. 
It  enacts  the  regulations  and  adopts  the  schedule 
of  fixed  charges. 

1.  The  officers  of  the  Board  of  Trustees  are  the 
President,  the  Vice-President,  the  Treasurer, 
and  the  Secretary. 

2.  The  by-laws  of  the  Board  of  Trustees  deter- 
mine its  procedure  in  matters  of  business. 

3.  No  person  is  allowed  to  canvass  for  money 
or  subscriptions  of  any  kind  within  the  Quad- 
rangles without  permission  from  the  Secretary 
of  the  Board  of  Trustees. 

Section  2. — The  Registrar  matriculates  students, 
collects  all  fees,  fines,  charges,  and  rents  due  the 
University  from  students,  and  maintains  a  savings 
bank  for  members  of  the  University. 

Section  3. — The  fiscal  year  of  the  University  be- 
gins July  I  and  ends  June  30  of  the  following 
year. 

Section  4. —  University  bills  cover  in  general  a 
Quarter's  obligations,  and  each  Quarter  is  a  dis- 
tinct financial  unit  in  respect  to  students'  financial 


relations  with  the  University.    In  general  no  bills 
are  sent  out. 

Section  5. — The  University  fees  for  admission 
are  as  follows  : 

1.  Candidates  for  admission  (a)  by  examina- 
tion, or  (b)  on  certificate,  pay  an  examination 
fee  of  S5. 

2.  Every  student  entering  the  University  pays 
a  matriculation  fee  of  85. 

Section  6. — The  University  registration  fees  are 
as  follows  : 

1.  An  extra  fee  of  $5  for  late  registration  is 
charged  students  who  fail  to  complete  their 
registration  in  the  time  designated.  (See  Art. 
VII,  sec.  1 1.) 

2.  Registration  being  once  effected,  a  fee  of  ^i 
is  charged  for  a  change  in  the  same.  (See  Art. 
VII,  sec.  12.) 

Section  7. — The  University  fees  for  instruction 
are  as  follows  : 

1.  The  Academy  tuition  fee  is  $40  per  Quarter. 

2.  The  regular  tuition  fee  in  the  University  and 
in  the  University  High  School  is  $40  per 
Quarter. 

3.  The  tuition  fee  in  the  Law  School  is  %<,o 
per  Quarter. 

4.  The  tuition  fee  in  the  College  of  the  School 
of  Education  is  J40,  and  in  the  University  Ele- 
mentary School  from  ^25  to  ^35  per  Quarter. 

5.  One-half  the  regular  tuition  fee  is  charged 
for  one  Term  (six  weeks.) 

6.  No  tuition  is  charged  in  the  Divinity  School 
during  the  Summer  Quarter. 

7.  A  student  taking  more  than  one  Major  pays 
full  tuition.  The  fee  for  one  Major  only  is  ^20 
per  Quarter. 

8.  The  fee  for  extra  work  in  the  Colleges  is  $15 
per  Major. 

9.  The  fee  for  special  examinations  is  85. 

10.  The  fee  for  one  Major  in  the  Correspondence- 
Study  Department  is  gi6;  one  Minor,  $8;  for 
one  course  in  the  English  Theological  Semi- 
nary, ^3. 


56 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XIII 


11.  The  fees  for  a  twelve-lecture  course  in  the 
Extension  Division  are  $225,  §175,  $125;  for 
a  six-lecture  course,  $125,  $100,  ^75,  respect- 
ively. The  fee  for  two  short  courses  under 
certain  conditions  is  $225. 

12.  Admission  fee  for  University  Extension 
lectures:  single  lectures,  25  cents;  twelve  lec- 
tures, %2 ;  one  week  (including  classes),  ^3  ;  three 
weeks,  %b  ;  six  weeks,  ^10;  ten  weeks,  ^15. 

13.  A  total  fee  covering  tuition  and  all  labora- 
tory fees  of  $57.50  per  Quarter  is  charged  stu- 
dents taking  the  medical  course.  A  special  fee 
covering  the  tuition  and  all  laboratory  fees  of 
$55  per  Quarter  is  temporarily  charged  medical 
students  who  matriculated  at  Rush  Medical  Col- 
lege on  or  before  April  i,  1903. 

Section  8. — The  fees  in  the  laboratories  are  as 
follows : 

1.  A  ticket  covering  supplies  and  breakage 
costs  $5.     (See  sec.  15,  no.  7.) 

2.  The  University  laboratory  fee  for  Chemistry, 
Practical  Gross  Anatomy,  Splanchnology,  Physi- 
ological Chemistry,  Pharmacology,  and  Pathol- 
ogy is  $5  for  a  Major  and  $2.50  for  a  Minor 
course  ;  for  other  Biological  courses,  $2.50  for 
a  Major  and  $1.25  for  a  Minor;  not  more  than 
$10  being  charged  in  one  Department. 

3.  The  Academy  laboratory  fee  for  Chemistry 
is  $3  for  a  Major  course;  Physics,  ^1.50  for  a 
Major  course;  Physiography  and  Botany,  %\ 
for  a  Major  course. 

4.  A  deposit  is  required  :  (a)  for  use  of  instru- 
ments in  the  courses  in  Physics ;  and  {S)  for 
the  use  of  a  skeleton  from  the  osteological 
laboratory  (see  sec.  15,  no.  9);  {c)  against  avoid- 
able breakage  and  loss,  of  all  students  taking 
the  medical  courses  and  paying  the  medical 
tuition  fee. 

Section  9. — The  library  fees  are  as  follows: 

1.  The  General  Library  fee  is  ^2.50  per  Quarter. 

2.  Library  fines  are  charged  as  follows : 

a.  A  fine  of  5  cents  a  day  is  charged  on  each 
volume  not  returned  or  renewed  two  weeks 


after  withdrawal  or  previous  renewal  from 
the  General  Library. 

b.  A  fine  of  15  cents  per  day  is  charged  for 
reference  books  drawn  from  any  library  of 
the  University  and  not  returned  the  follow- 
ing morning  before  9:30. 

c.  A  fine  of  25  cents  is  charged  when  a 
messenger  is  sent  to  secure  an  overdue  book, 
the  Librarian's  notice  having  been  disre- 
garded by  the  borrower. 

3.  A  moderate  fee,  varying  according  to  cir- 
cumstances, is  charged  for  libraries  loaned  to 
Extension  centers,  educational  institutions, 
and  students. 

Section  10. —  A  fee  of  $10  is  charged  students 
receiving  degrees,  a  fee  of  $5  to  students  receiv- 
ing certificates,  no  fee  being  charged  those  receiv- 
ing the  title  of  Associate. 

Section  11. —  The  charges  for  rooms  and  board 
are  as  follows : 

1.  The  quarterly  rental  for  rooms  varies  as  fol- 
lows : 

a.  In  the  Schools  and  the  Colleges  from  ^14 
to  $75  a  Quarter. 

b.  In  the  Divinity  School,  from  $8  to  $12  a 
Quarter. 

2.  Room  rent  covers  charges  for  heat,  light, 
and  care  (except  laundering  of  linen  and  tow- 
els in  the  Divinity  Halls  and  Women's  Halls). 

3.  Board  is  furnished  at  the  Academy  at  $48, 
and  at  the  University  Commons  for  Women  at 
$42  a  Quarter.  The  rates  for  board  in  the  Uni- 
versity Commons  for  Men  will  be  announced 
later. 

Section  12. —  In  addition  to  the  fixed  charges 
given  above,  there  are  certain  expenses  in  con- 
nection with  the  use  of  special  facilities  of  the 
University,  as  follows :  {a)  deposits  for  keys  used 
(refunded)  ;  ((J)  locker  rent  in  Gymnasium ;  [c) 
Gymnasium  suits  ($4)  required  of  all  students  in 
Physical  Culture;  id)  text-books,  syllabi,  station- 
ery (Book  Store). 

Section    13. —  All    accounts    due    are    payable 


Article  XIV 


THE  REGULATIONS 


57 


quarterly  in  advance.  The  payment  of  bills  com- 
pleting registration  is  made  within  the  first  two 
days  of  the  Quarter.  Checks  are  made  payable 
to  the  University  of  Chicago  and  remitted  to  the 
Registrar. 

Section  14. —  The  following  regulations  making 
special  terms  for  payment  are  established  : 

1.  In  University  College  to  students  in  ac- 
tive service  as  teachers  in  Cook  county  a  re- 
duction is  made  to  $10  a  Major  and  ^5  a 
Minor  for  courses  taken  in  University  College. 

2.  No  reduction  is  made  in  University  Wom- 
en's Commons  bills  on  account  of  absences 
during  the  Quarter. 

3.  The  matriculation  fee  is  waived  in  case  of 
former  students  of  the  old  University  or  of  the 
Morgan  Park  Theological  Seminary. 

4.  Doctors  of  Philosophy  pursuing  special 
work  pay  the  ordinary  matriculation  fee, 
library,  and  incidental  fees,  a  tuition  fee  for  a 
regular  course  of  instruction,  and,  if  not  taking 
a  regular  course,  but  pursuing  investigation  in 
laboratories,  the  laboratory  fee  or  fees,  and  such 
other  sums  as  may  be  determined  in  the  case 
by  the  President.     (See  no.  6  below.) 

5.  After  completing  three  years  of  resident 
graduate  work,  students  engaged  in  thesis  work 
only  are  required  to  register,  but  without  pay- 
ment of  tuition  fees.  The  payment  of  library 
and  laboratory  fees  is  not  excused. 

6.  Doctors  of  Philosophy  of  the  University  as 
members  of  the  University  Congregation  have 
the  privileges  of  the  University  without  pay- 
ment of  fees. 

7.  Instruction  in  the  University  is  given  free  to 
all  instructors  in  affiliated  Colleges  and  Acade- 
mies, with  the  following  conditions  and  limita- 
tions :  (a)  By  instructors  is  meant  teachers 
under  regular  salaries  who  give  instruction  for 
at  least  half  the  regular  teaching  period  of  the 
school,  {p)  By  instruction  is  meant  only  regu- 
lar courses.  University  Extension  lectures, 
University   Extension  class  studies   and  corre- 


spondence courses  are  not  included,  {c)  Ma- 
triculation and  laboratory  fees  are  not  in- 
cluded in  free  tuition,  {d)  To  secure  such  free 
instruction  for  teachers,  the  executive  head  of 
each  institution  files  with  the  Dean  of  Affilia- 
tions, on  or  before  June  15  of  each  year, 
a  list  of  the  instructors  under  engagement 
for  the  ensuing  academic  year,  i^e)  The  in- 
structor's name  must  appear  in  the  official 
list  of  the  institution  for  the  year  during 
which  instruction  is  desired.  (/)  The  leave 
of  absence  from  the  institution  must  not 
exceed  fifteen  successive  months,  and  the  in- 
structor must  be  under  contract  for  a  year's 
service  at  the  institution  after  residence  at  the 
University.  (^)  A  statement  of  these  facts  in 
the  case  of  each  instructor  must  be  filed  with 
the  Dean  of  Affiliations  at  the  time  of  registra- 
tion. (}i)  When  instructors  are  both  pursu- 
ing studies  at  the  University  and  teaching,  the 
University  reserves  the  right  to  require  the  dis- 
continuance of  either  the  teaching  or  the  Uni- 
versity work. 

8.  For  Fellowships  and  Scholarships  which  meet 
the  cost  of  tuition,  etc.,  see  Art.  X,  sees  9,  10. 
Section  15. — The  following  regulations  apply  to 
the  procedure  customary  in  fiscal  matters: 

1.  All  fees  are  payable  at  the  office  of  the 
Registrar. 

2.  Rooms  are  assigned  in  order  of  application, 
preference  being  given  to  House  members, 
conditioned  upon  the  receipt  of  one  Term's 
rental  within  seven  days  from  date  of  assign- 
ment. 

3.  Rooms  are  not  rented  for  a  period  shorter 
than  a  Quarter  or  twelve  weeks,  except  in  the 
Summer  Quarter,  when  they  may  be  taken  for 
six  weeks. 

4.  Assignments  of  rooms  are  made  about  thirty 
days  prior  to  the  first  day  of  the  Quarter  for 
which  rooms  are  wanted.  Applicants  are  then 
notified  of  the  rooms  assigned  to  them  and  the 
payment  necessary  (one  Term's  rental)  to  secure 
their   reservation.     The  balance  of  room   rent 


58 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XVI 


with  all  other  bills  is  paid  on  or  before  the 
opening  of  the  Quarter. 

5.  Rooms  cannot  be  subrented,  exchanged,  or 
transferred  without  the  Registrar's  permission. 

6.  In  general,  University  fees  are  not  refunded 
or  rebated. 

7.  Deposits  on  instruments,  keys,  or  other  arti- 
cles are  refunded  if  same  are  returned  in  good 
condition. 

8.  The  unused  portion  of  coupon  tickets  for 
breakage  is  redeemed  at  the  close  of  the  course. 

9.  The  deposit  for  the  use  of  the  skeleton  (see 
sec.  8,  no.  4)  is  refunded  when  the  skeleton  is 
returned. 

10.  Deductions  will  be  made  from  the  medical 
student's  breakage  and  loss  deposit  to  cover  the 
cost  of  articles  not  returned,  or  of  damage  to 
University  property.  Each  student  will  be 
charged  for  damage  or  loss  for  which  he  is 
individually  responsible,  and  for  his  pro  rata 
share  of  damage  or  loss,  the  responsibility  for 
which  cannot  be  individually  located.  The 
balance  due  on  this  deposit  may  be  reclaimed 
at  the  end  of  any  Quarter,  and  must  be  so 
reclaimed  not  later  than  the  end  of  the  third 
Quarter  from  the  time  the  deposit  was  made. 

ARTICLE  XIV.    THE   UNIVERSITY  PRESS. 

Section  1.— For  the  Officers  and  Ruling  Bodies 
of  the  University  Press  see  Art.  II,   sees.  10  and 
II,  and  Art.  Ill,  sees.  6  and  7. 
The  Director  of  the  University  Press  presents 
to  the  Board  of  the  University  Press  a  report 
monthly,  which   includes   data   relating  to   all 
departments  of  the  University  Press. 
Section  2. — The    publication    of  books  by  the 
University  Press  is  controlled  by  special  regula- 
tions. 

Sections. —  In  the  case  of  the  journals  of  the 
University,  the  following  regulations  are  in  force: 
I.  The  journals  of  the  University  are  subject,  in 
relation  to  matter,  to  the  decision  of  the  Head 
of  the  Department;  in  relation  to  financial 
questions,  to  the  Trustees,  conference  with  the 
President  and  publisher  being  assumed. 


2.  The  editorial  work  is  performed  in  each  case 
under  the  direction  of  the  Head  of  the  Depart- 
ment. 

3.  The  financial  responsibility  for  publication  is 
assumed  by  the  University.  Members  of  the 
University  contributing  to  the  journals  receive 
no  honorarium. 

4.  While  one  purpose  of  such  publications  is  to 
furnish  a  medium  for  the  publication  of  material 
prepared  by  members  of  the  University,  other 
contributions  are  received  at  the  discretion  of 
the  editor. 

5.  Each  article,  editorial,  book  review,  or  state- 
ment of  any  kind  appearing  in  a  University 
publication,  is  signed  by  the  writer.  For  such 
matter  the  writer,  not  the  University,  is  respon- 
sible, but  the  editor  assumes  responsibility  for 
the  admission  of  the  article  or  statement. 

6.  Publications  received  in  exchange,  and  books 
received  for  notice,  remain  the  property  of  the 
University. 

Section  4. —  A  style-book  adopted  by  the  Board 
of  the  University  Press  determines  matters  of  form 
in  University  publications. 

Section  5. —  Certain  series  of  Departmental  Pub- 
lications have  been  established  by  the  University. 

1.  A  series  of  Divinity  Studies  is  published 
under  the  following  conditions: 

a.  Admission  of  a  study  to  the  series  is  ob- 
tained on  recommendation  of  the  Depart- 
ment concerned  and  by  vote  of  the  Faculty 
of  the  Divinity  School. 

b.  No  expense  is  incurred  in  the  publication 
of  papers  except  on  approval  of  the  Faculty 
of  the  Divinity  School. 

2.  Other  Departmental  Publications  are  recom- 
mended by  the  Departments  concerned,  and 
considered  by  the  Board  of  the  University  Press. 

Section  6. — The  following  special  regulations 
apply  to  fiscal  matters  : 

I.  Proposals  for  all  purchases  (a)  are  approved 
by  the  Head  of  the  Department  concerned ;  {J>) 
are   negotiated   through    the   University   Press 


Article  XV 


THE  REGULATIONS 


59 


after  (i)  estimates  have  been  secured,  and  (2) 
sufficient  appropriation  is  found  available  for 
the  purchase  ;  (c)  in  case  of  books  the  Librarian, 
and  in  case  of  apparatus  the  Auditor,  sees 
that  the  amount  of  the  appropriations  shall  not 
be  exceeded  by  the  purchases. 

2.  The  University  Press  sends  bills  with  every 
consignment  of  books  to  the  library,  and  no 
books  are  accepted  unless  accompanied  by  such 
bills. 

3.  The  Press  may  take  a  ready  reference  receipt 
for  books  delivered,  and  the  Librarian  may 
likewise  take  a  receipt  for  books  returned. 

4.  The  Business  Manager  of  the  University  pays 
the  bills  duly  attested  by  the  Director  of  the 
University  Press  for  all  books  purchased. 
Section  7. — ^The  University  Press  has  charge  of 

the  printing  of  University  official  documents. 

1.  All  requisitions  for  such  printing  come  from 
the  President's  office. 

2.  All  proofs  of  such  documents  are  prepared 
and  distributed  on  orders  from  the  Recorder. 
Section  8. — The  University  Press  Division  has 

charge  of  the  mailing  of  University  official  docu- 
ments under  the  direction  of  the  President. 

1.  All  orders  for  the  distribution  of  such  docu- 
ments come  from  the  Secretary  to  the  President. 

2.  A  mailing  department  of  the  University  Press 
{a)  addresses  wrappers ;  {b)  preserves  a  record 
of  material  distributed  ;  (<:)  reports  monthly  to 
the  President  on  the  stock  on  hand. 

ARTICLE  XV.     THE   UNIVERSITY  LIBRARIES, 
LABORATORIES,  AND  MUSEUMS. 

Section  i. —  For  the  Officers  and  Ruling  Bodies 
of  this  Division,  see  Art.  II,  sees.  10,  11,  19,  20, 
and  Art.  Ill,  sees.  6,  7. 

Section  2. —  The  libraries  of  the  University  in- 
clude :  {a)  the  General  Library  ;  (<J)  the  Depart- 
mental Libraries  ;  (c)  the  Branch  Libraries ;  {d) 
the  Traveling  (loan)  Libraries  of  the  University 
Extension  Division. 

Section  3. —  The  general  regulations  applying 
to  all  the  libraries  are  the  following : 


1.  The  University  grants  the  privileges  of  the 
library  (a)  to  resident  members  of  the  Univer- 
sity, paying  regular  fees;  {b)  to  non-members 
of  the  University  or  former  students  upon  pay- 
ment of  regular  library  fee  of  ^2.50  a  Quarter. 

2.  The  University  issues  complimentary  library 
cards  for  four  weeks  or  less  to  properly  accred- 
ited scholars  visiting  Chicago. 

3.  Where  feasible,  the  University  lends  books 
and  apparatus  to  affiliated  institutions  at  the 
«<?/ cost  of  transit  and  handling. 

4.  Books  are  exchanged  between  the  various 
libraries  by  mutual  agreement  between  the  rep- 
resentatives of  the  libraries  concerned,  due  no- 
tice being  sent  to  the  General  Library. 

5.  Duplicate  orders  for  collections  of  books 
already  owned  by  another  library  of  the  Uni- 
versity are  submitted  to  the  Administrative 
Board  for  approval. 

6.  Books  are  temporarily  transferred  from  one 
library  to  another  by  agreement  between  the 
Librarian  and  the  Departmental  Adviser,  subject 
to  recall. 

7.  For  the  regulations  governing  fees  and  fines 
in  the  libraries,  see  Art.  XIII,  sec.  9. 

8.  The  University  retains  the  right  to  recall 
books  needed  for  special  purposes. 

9.  The  University  reserves  books  when  re- 
turned in  the  order  of  application  for  the  book. 

10.  The  University  withdraws  from  general 
circulation  such  works  of  reference  as  are 
needed  for  general  consultation. 

11.  The  regulations  applying  to  the  binding  of 
books  are  as  follows: 

a.  The  duty  of  preparing  the  original  orders 
for  binding  is  assigned  to  the  General  Li- 
brary. Suggestions  for  binding  may  origi- 
nate either  with  the  Department  or  with  the 
General  Library.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  Gen- 
eral Library  to  prepare  such  orders  for  all 
unbound  books  and  completed  volumes  of 
periodicals,  as  well  as  for  all  other  books 
needing  rebinding. 

b.  These  orders  are  approved  by  the  Head 


6o 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XV 


of  the  Department  for  which  the  binding  is 
to  be  done,  or  by  the  Library  Adviser,  acting 
on  the  authorization  of  the  Head  of  the  De- 
partment. 

c.  The  binding  orders  are  made  on  library 
cards,  one  card  for  each  title,  after  an  ac- 
cepted form. 

d.  The  cost  of  binding  is  charged  to  the 
book  fund  of  the  Department  which  orders 
the  binding. 

Section4. — The  regulations  applying  to  the  Gen- 
eral Library  are  as  follows  : 

1.  Members  of  the  University  file  applications 
for  library  cards  to  secure  library  privileges. 

2.  The  library  card  issued  to  members  of  the 
University  or  others  entitles  the  student  to  bor- 
row not  more  than  three  books  at  one  time. 

3.  Books  bearing  no  fines  may  be  renewed  in 
person  or  by  mail. 

4.  The  University  imposes  fines  for  books  kept 
beyond  the  time  allowed,  due  notice  of  such 
fines  being  sent  to  the  borrower.  In  case  of 
disregard  of  such  notice,  a  messenger  is  sent 
for  the  book  and  a  further  fine  imposed. 

5.  Students  refusing  or  neglecting  to  pay  fines 
due :  (a)  are  debarred  from  further  use  of  the 
library;  (^)  are  not  allowed  honorable  dismis- 
sal from  the  University;  and  {c)  may  not  grad- 
uate from  the  University. 

6.  Students  are  forbidden  to  mark  or  mutilate 
books  in  any  way. 

7.  The  borrower  pays  for  damages  to  books 
occurring  while  in  his  possession. 

8.  The  University  debars  students  from  library 
privileges  who  abuse  such  privileges. 

Section  5.^ The   regulations    applying    to    the 
Departmental  Libraries  are  as  follows  : 

1.  The  same  general  plan  is  adopted  for  the 
administration  of  all  Departmental  Libraries 
and  for  the  use  of  books  in  these  libraries. 

2.  These  libraries  are  regarded  as  reference 
libraries,  and  books  may  be  withdrawn  from 
them  only  under  the  conditions  here  laid  down. 


3.  No  book,  map,  manuscript,  periodical, 
pamphlet,  print,  or  other  article  is  taken  from 
any  library,  whether  by  administrative  officer, 
member  of  Faculty,  student,  or  other  person, 
unless  record  of  such  withdrawal  is  made  at 
the  time.  The  name  of  the  person  drawing, 
the  title  and  accession  number  of  the  book 
drawn,  and  the  date  is  recorded  in  every  case. 
When  a  book  is  returned,  the  person  returning 
it  sees  that  record  of  return  is  made. 

4.  a.  No  book  under  any  circumstances  is  kept 
for  more  than  three  months  without  renewal, 
except  on  the  written  permission  of  the  Group 
Library  Adviser  or  the  Head  of  the  Depart- 
ment concerned.  Any  Group  or  single  De- 
partment (if  not  included  in  a  Group)  may 
shorten  the  period  for  which  a  book  may  be 
kept  out,  at  its  option. 

b.  Books  are  drawn  from  Departmental  Li- 
braries by  students  only  over  night.  The 
hours  for  the  withdrawal  and  return  of  books 
are  fixed  by  the  Group  or  Departments  con- 
cerned. This  permission  may  be  refused  by 
any  Group  or  by  any  Department  (if  not 
included  in  a  Group)  at  its  option. 

c.  Members  of  the  Faculty  of  the  Department 
or  Group  concerned  have  the  privilege  of 
drawing  books  from  their  Department  or 
Group  Library,  subject  to  the  provisions  of 
these  regulations,  for  a  period  not  to  exceed 
three  months.  Books  so  drawn  may  be 
renewed  at  the  end  of  the  period,  if  not 
required  by  others.  Instructors  connected 
with  other  Departments  are  allowed  this  privi- 
lege only  on  the  written  permission  of  the 
Group  Library  Adviser  or  the  Head  of  the 
Department  from  whose  Library  the  book  is 
to  be  drawn.  This  permission  is  only  for 
the  book  and  person  named,  unless  a  general 
and  continuous  permission  is  specified.  Any- 
one desiring  to  use  in  the  library  a  book 
drawn  out  by  an  instructor  notifies  the  Library 
Adviser,  who  then  requests  the  immediate 
return  of  the  book  to  the  library. 


Article  XV 


THE  REGULATIONS 


6i 


d.  The  same  privilege  granted  to  instructors 
in  the  drawing  of  books  is  extended  to 
students  engaged  in  the  preparation  of  theses 
or  other  research  work  of  a  similar  advanced 
character  at  the  option  of  the  Department 
concerned.  A  list  of  all  persons  in  each 
Department  (instructors  and  students)  to 
whom  this  privilege  is  granted  is  kept  where 
at  all  times  it  may  be  consulted  by  the  library 
attendants  in  the  Department  or  Group 
library  concerned. 

e.  A  member  of  the  Faculty  in  any  Depart- 
ment may  grant  written  permission  to  draw 
books  in  his  name  from  the  library  of  the 
Department  concerned  for  a  person  not  to 
exceed  three  months.  Such  permission  is 
only  for  the  particular  book  and  person 
named,  and  is  not  a  continuous  or  general 
permission.  In  every  case  the  instructor 
granting  such  permission  is  personally  liable 
for  loss.  This  permission  is  filed  and  kept 
on  record  by  the  attendant  or  by  the  Library 
Adviser.  This  privilege  may  be  refused  by 
any  Department  at  its  option. 

f.  Current  numbers  of  periodicals  may  be 
withdrawn  only  on  the  written  permission  of 
the  Group  Library  Adviser  or  Head  of  the 
Department  concerned. 

g.  Books  in  most  frequent  use,  such  as  dic- 
tionaries, encyclopaedias,  and  the  like  ;  books 
of  special  rarity  or  value,  and  books  con- 
stantly needed  for  the  use  of  any  course,  may 
be  withdrawn  from  circulation  with  the  ap- 
proval of  the  Group  Library  Adviser  or  the 
Head  of  the  Department.  Such  books  are 
marked  with  a  special  label  (to  be  procured 
from  the  General  Library)  indicating  that 
the  book  to  which  it  is  attached  is  not  to  be 
taken  from  the  library  under  any  circum- 
stances. 

h.  From  the  library  of  the  Biological  Group 
complete  files  of  serials  not  to  exceed  five  in 
number  and  other  volumes  not  to  exceed  one 
hundred  may  be  withdrawn  for  a  period  not 


to  exceed  one  year  (but  with  privilege  of  re- 
newal) to  be  placed  in  a   Department  build- 
ing.   The  original  application  for  such  books 
must  be  made  in  writing  by  the  Head  of  the 
Department,  and   must  be  approved   by  the 
Group    Library    Adviser    and    the    Library 
Board.     Yearly  renewals  may   be   made   on 
approval    of    the    Group     Library    Adviser. 
Books  so  withdrawn  are  treated  as  reserved 
books  and  withdrawn  from  circulation.    They 
are  under  the  supervision    of   the    Head   of 
the  Department   or  of  some  one  designated 
by  him,  and  are  regularly  inspected  by  the 
Library  Inspector  and  the  Group  Librarian, 
who   see    that    they    are    kept    at    all    times 
accessible  to  instructors  in  all  Departments. 
i.  Books  may  be  withdrawn   from   Group  or 
Departmental  Libraries  for  permanent  keep- 
ing in   laboratories   or  museums  only  when 
they  are  duplicate  copies  of  books  retained 
in  a  Departmental  Library.     Such  duplicates 
are  removed  to  a  laboratory  or  museum  room 
only  when    a  locked  case  is  there  provided 
for    shelving    them.     They    are    under    the 
supervision  of  the  instructor  who  has  charge 
of   the   room,   or  of  someone  designated  by 
him,  who    also  keeps  the  keys   to   the  case. 
They  are  inspected  regularly  by  the  Library 
Inspector   and  the   Group   Librarian  or  Li- 
brary   Adviser.     Such    books   are   not  with- 
drawn except  upon  written  permission  of  the 
instructor  in  charge.     Access  to  them   is  not 
denied  to  other  instructors  in  any  Depart- 
ment. 
5.  The  Library  Inspector  sends    a    notice    in 
every  case  where  a  book  is   kept   longer   than 
three  months  without  renewal.     At  the  request 
of    the    Library    Adviser,    he    sends    a    notice 
requiring    the    immediate    return    of    a   book 
which    is    needed    in    any    library.       He    re- 
ports   to    the    Library     Board     (through    the 
Librarian)    all    cases    where    books    are     not 
returned   within  two  weeks  after   such  notice 
has  been  sent. 


62 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XV 


6.  Any  book  lost  or  not  returned  within  six 
months  after  notice  has  been  sent  is  either 
replaced  by  the  person  in  whose  name  the 
book  has  been  drawn,  or  said  person  pays  into 
the  hands  of  the  Librarian  such  a  sum  as  in 
the  opinion  of  the  Librarian  is  the  present 
market  value  of  the  book. 

7.  Keys  to  any  library  room  are  given  out 
only  on  the  written  order  of  the  Library 
Adviser  concerned.  He  keeps  a  record  in 
every  case  of  the  name  and  address  of  the 
person  to  whom  each  key  is  issued,  and  may 
recall  the  key  at  any  time  at  his  option.  No 
person  to  whom  a  key  has  been  given  shall 
lend  his  key  or  admit  others  to  the  library 
with  it. 

8.  Any  person  violating  these  regulations  may 
be  denied  the  privilege  of  using  any  or  all  of 
the  libraries  of  the  University  either  perma- 
nently or  for  a  limited  period  of  time,  by 
a  vote  of  the  Library  Board  with  the  approval 
of  the  President. 

9.  At  the  opening  of  each  Quarter  it  is  the 
duty  of  the  Library  Inspector  to  see  that  all 
library  attendants  are  instructed  in  these  regu- 
lations. 

10.  These  regulations  are  printed  and  a  copy 
is  sent  to  each  member  of  the  Faculty.  A 
copy  is  posted  in  a  conspicuous  position  in 
every  library  of  the  University. 

11.  Books  of  the  Berlin  and  Morgan  Park  Col- 
lections are  permanently  assigned  to  Depart- 
mental Libraries  on  application  by  the  Depart- 
mental Adviser,  and  the  approval  of  the 
Administrative  Board. 

12.  Ofificers  of  instruction  make  suggestions 
with  reference  to  the  Departmental  Libraries 
through  the  Departmental  Adviser. 

13.  No  Departmental  Library  may  change  its 
location  without  permission  of  the  Administra- 
tive Board. 

14.  Departmental  Libraries  are  open  daily  until 
6  o'clock  p.  M.,  and  in  the  evening  with  the 
special  permission  of  the  Library  Adviser. 


15.  The  Librarian  notifies,  immediately,  the 
proper  departmental  officer  in  case  the  funds 
on  hand  in  the  Department  are  not  sufficient  to 
cover  an  order  for  books. 

Section  6. — The  following  regulations  apply  to 
Group  libraries  : 

I.  Group  libraries  are  formed  on  the  following 
conditions  : 

a.  Books  are  placed  in  adjoining  rooms  with 
a  single  common  entrance. 

b.  A  common  author  and  title  catalogue  ar- 
ranged in  one  alphabet  is  made.  Books, 
shelves,  and  cards  are  marked  upon  a  uni- 
form system. 

c.  A  single  Library  Adviser  for  each  Group 
is  appointed  by  the  President  in  consultation 
with  the  Heads  of  the  Departments  con- 
cerned. 

d.  The  Adviser  is  chairman  of  a  committee 
composed  of  the  Heads  of  the  Departments 
concerned,  or  at  their  option,  of  one  repre- 
sentative from  each  Department,  in  the  place 
of  the  Head.  The  Adviser  has  a  general 
supervision  of  the  management  of  the  libra- 
ries within  his  Group. 

e.  The  Library  Adviser,  in  consultation  with 
the  committee,  prepares  regulations  for  each 
Group,  which  must  be  approved  by  the  Board 
of  Libraries.  These  regulations  cover  the 
following  points:  (i)  hours  during  which 
the  library  shall  be  open;  (2)  provision  for 
attendants;  (3)  hours  of  their  attendance; 
(4)  measures  taken  for  preventing  loss  of 
books;  (5)  distribution  of  library  keys;  (6) 
rules  concerning  loaning  of  books;  (7)  gen- 
eral plan  of  cataloguing  adopted. 

f.  A  Group  Librarian  is  appointed  for  each 
Group  when  the  necessary  funds  for  the  pay- 
ment of  his  salary  are  available. 

g.  In  case  no  Group  Librarian  is  appointed, 
the  administration  of  the  Group  library  is 
carried  on  by  the  Library  Adviser. 


Article  XV 


THE  REGULATIONS 


63 


h.  The  Library  Adviser  is  ex  officio  a  member 
of  the  Board  of  Libraries,  Laboratories,  and 
Museums. 

2.  The  following  Groups  of  Departmental  Li- 
braries have  been  established  : 

a.  The  Classical  Group  (Comparative  Phi- 
lology, Greek,  Latin,  and   History   of   Art). 

b.  The  Historical  Group  (Political  Economy, 
Political  Science,  History,  Sociology  and 
Anthropology). 

c.  The  Modern  Language  Group  (Romance, 
Germanic,  English,  and  Literature  in  Eng- 
lish). 

d.  The  Haskell  Group  (Semitic,  New  Testa- 
ment, Church  History,  Systematic  Theology, 
Homiletics,  and  Comparative  Religion). 

3.  The  Haskell  Group  is  subject  to  the  follow- 
ing regulations  : 

a.  It  is  administered  as  a  reference  library, 
but  students  have  the  privilege  of  drawing 
books  for  use  over  night. 

b.  An  instructor  desiring  to  grant  leave  to  a 
student  to  take  books  out  of  these  libraries 
for  a  longer  period  furnishes  to  the  student 
in  writing  for  presentation  to  the  attendant 
the  name  of  the  student,  and  the  name  of  the 
book  or  books  to  be  taken  out. 

c.  On  request  from  any  instructor,  such  a 
book  may  be  called  in  at  once. 

d.  Three  days  is  the  limit  within  which  books 
may  be  retained  on  such  an  order. 

e.  Instructors  issue  such  orders  for  books  in 
their  own  Department  only. 

Section  7. — The  regulations  applying  to  Travel- 
ing (loan)  Libraries  are  as  follows  : 

1.  Transportation  charges  for  loan  libraries  are 
paid  by  the  borrower. 

2.  Books  in  loan  libraries  may  be  purchased  by 
returning  in  place  of  the  book  the  price  indi- 
cated in  the  book. 

Section  8. —  Branch  Libraries  are  governed  by 
the  rules  and  regulations  applying  to  the  other 
libraries  of  the  University. 


Section  9. —  Special  regulations  applying  to  Dis- 
sertations in  the  Library  are  as  follows : 

1.  Dissertations  received  from  other  institutions 
in  exchange  shall  be  preserved  in  the  General 
Library,  and  those  of  special  interest  to  any 
one  Department,  shall  be  indicated  by  a  refer- 
ence card  in  the  card  catalogue  of  the  Depart- 
mental Library. 

2.  The  regulations  affecting  the  dissertations  of 
Masters  and  Doctors  of  Philosophy  of  the  Uni- 
versity are  found  in  Art.  XI,  sec.  10. 

The  following  special  regulations  apply  to  the 
Doctors'  dissertations  : 

a.  The  Librarian  of  the  General  Library  re- 
serves ten  copies  of  each  dissertation,  one  for 
the  General  Library,  one  for  the  Author's 
Library,  and  eight  to  be  used  as  occasion 
may  arise,  in  making  exchanges  with  learned 
societies,  and  such  other  bodies  as  do  not  fall 
within  the  other  regulations. 

b.  The  other  copies  may  be  distributed  to  the 
most  important  libraries  of  the  United  States 
and  Europe,  and  a  plan  of  exchange  of  dis- 
sertations and  similar  publications  is  arranged 
with  them. 

c.  Each  Departmental  Library  of  the  Univer- 
sity is  presented  with  one  copy  on  application 
from  the  Library  Adviser.  (See  also  Art.  II, 
sec.  14,  no.  15). 

Section  10. —  Regulations  applying  to  the  Muse- 
ums are  as  follows  : 

1.  Annual  reports,  covering  the  period  from 
October  i  to  September  30  inclusive,  are  made 
in  October  to  the  Director  of  Museums  by  the 
Curators  of  the  several  museums,  and  are  by  him 
laid  before  the  Board  of  Libraries,  Laboratories, 
and  Museums. 

2.  Special  reports  are  made  whenever  any  nota- 
ble accessions  are  secured,  and  are  dealt  with  in 
the  same  way. 

3.  The  methods  of  record  recommended  by  the 
Director  of  Museums  are  adopted  so  far  as 
practicable. 


64 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XVI 


ARTICLE  XVI.     THE  UNIVERSITY  EXTENSION 
DIVISION. 

Section  i. —  For  the  Officers  and  Ruling  Bodies 
of  the  Division,  see  Art.  II,  sees.  lo  and  ii,  and 
Art.  Ill,  sees.  6  and  7. 

1.  A  Secretary,  appointed  for  each  Department, 
has  immediate  charge  of  that  Department. 

2.  The  Head  of  Instruction  of  a  Department, 
or  an  instructor  designated  by  the  Head,  is  con- 
sulted in  reference  to  the  announcements  of 
courses  and  the  selection  of  lecturers  or  teachers 
in  that  Department  in  the  University  Extension 
Division. 

Section  2. —  The  University  Extension  Division 
includes  three  Departments  : 

1.  Lecture-Study. 

2.  Correspondence-Study. 

3.  Traveling-Library. 

Sections- — The  Lecture-Study  Department  pro- 
vides non-resident  instruction  through  courses  of 
lectures  by  approved  instructors,  facilities  being 
provided  for  collateral  reading,  written  exercises, 
and  discussion. 

1.  In  lecture-study  courses  lectures  are  given 
weekly  or  fortnightly  for  six  or  twelve  weeks, 
each  course  consisting  of  six  or  more  lectures 
relating  to  one  topic. 

2.  In  connection  with  each  lecture  course  there 
are  :  {a)  a  Class  for  more  detailed  study  of  the 
subject ;  {b)  a  Syllabus  or  printed  outline  of  the 
lecture  with  suggested  readings  ;  {c)  a  Written 
Exercise  upon  an  assigned  topic  ;  and  {d)  where 
feasible  a  Traveling  Library  to  facilitate  the 
reading  of  the  recommended  works. 

3.  The  University  supplements  the  lecture-study 
course  when  desired  by  a  special  class,  the  work 
of  which  is  conducted  by  an  instructor  approved 
for  this  purpose. 

4.  Any  club  or  society,  the  members  of  which 
wish  to  pursue  a  line  of  study  supplementary  to 
the  regular  lecture-study  work  may,  upon  appli- 
cation, be  constituted  as  a  supplementary  class. 


The  lecturer  co-operates  in  the  work  of  such  a 
club. 

5.  The  Traveling-Library  Department  supple- 
ments the  work  of  the  instructor  by  aiding  the 
student  to  secure  the  text-books  and  works  of 
reference  recommended  and  suggesting  plans 
for  the  better  utilization  of  existing  library 
facilities. 

Section  4. — The  Correspondence-Study  Depart- 
ment provides  non-resident  instruction  through 
written  papers,  the  work  of  the  student  being 
directed  and  corrected  by  approved  instructors 
of  the  University. 

1.  A  student  desiring  correspondence  instruc- 
tion fills  out  a  formal  application  blank  and  for- 
wards the  same  to  the  Secretary  of  that  Depart- 
ment. 

2.  Instruction  may  be  either  formal  or  informal. 
Formal  correspondence  work  is  conducted 
through  printed  instruction  sheets  designed  to 
guide  the  student's  work.  The  instructor  cor- 
rects the  recitations  written  by  the  student  and 
returns  them  to  him.  Informal  instruction  is 
arranged  to  meet  particular  needs  of  advanced 
students.  In  informal  courses  the  formal  les- 
son may  be  replaced  by  other  evidence  of  sat- 
isfactory work. 

Section  5. — Admission  to  Extension  work  is 
subject  to  the  following  regulations  : 

1.  No  preliminary  examination  or  proof  of  pre- 
vious work  is  required  of  applicants  for  Univer- 
sity Extension  courses. 

2.  A  student  may  begin  Correspondence  work 
at  any  time  in  the  year. 

3.  Students  desiring  Correspondence-instruc- 
tion matriculate  in  the  University  and  pay  the 
proper  tuition  fees. 

Section  6. — The  following  regulations    govern 

instruction  in  the  University  Extension  Division  : 

I.  Correspondence-Study  students  are  classified 

as  "  regular  "  or  "[special "  students  according  as 


Article  XVI 


THE  REGULATIONS 


65 


they  have  or  have  not  satisfied  the  requirements 
for  entrance  to  one  of  the  Colleges  or  Schools 
of  the  University. 

2.  Courses  in  the  Correspondence-Study  De- 
partment are  organized  as  Majors  or  Minors. 
A  Major  course  regularly  consists  of  forty  and 
a  Minor  course  of  twenty  lessons,  but  the  num- 
ber is  varied  in  particular  cases. 

3.  Not  more  than  two  Correspondence-Study 
courses  may  be  pursued  at  one  time,  except  by 
consent  of  the  Director  of  the  Division. 

4.  A  student  in  the  Correspondence-Study  De- 
partment not  reporting  by  recitation  paper  or 
by  letter  within  ninety  days  forfeits  his  right  to 
further  instruction  in  return  for  the  fee  paid. 

5.  A  student  is  expected  to  complete  each 
course  in  Correspondence-Study  work  within 
one  year  from  the  end  of  the  Quarter  in  which 
he  registers. 

6.  An  extension  of  time  is  allowed  for  a  Corre- 
spondence-Study course  (a)  during  residence 
at  the  University  upon  notice  to  the  Secretary; 
and  {J})  for  one  full  year  in  case  of  serious  dis- 
ability, with  the  consent  of  the  Secretary,  ap- 
proval of  the  instructor,  and  payment  of  a  fee 
of  one-fourth  the  original  tuition  fee. 
Section  7. — Credit  is  given  for  University  Ex- 
tension work  subject  to  the  following  regulations  : 

1.  A  University  Extension  Certificate  is  awarded 
{a)  lecture-study  students  who  pass  a  satisfac- 
tory examination  on  the  work  performed ;  and 
{b)  Correspondence-Study  students  who  com- 
plete satisfactorily  the  work  of  a  Correspond- 
ence course. 

2.  Lecture-Study  Certificates  are  of  two  grades, 
namely,  "pass,"  and  "distinction." 

3.  Lecture-Study  examinations  for  certificates 
may  be  taken  by  students  who  have  (a)  attended 
at  least  two-thirds  of  the  lectures  and  classes  of 
the  course ;  {!>)  written  satisfactory  exercises 
upon  at  least  two-thirds  of  the  lectures;  and 
(c)  pursued  approved  supplementary  study. 

4.  A  Minor  credit  is  given  to  students  suc- 
cessfully completing  the  work  required  in  con- 


nection with  twelve  lecture-studies  and  passing 
the  examination. 

5.  Correspondence-Study  courses  secure  credit 
in  the  University  Extension  Division  corre- 
sponding to  their  credit  value  as  Majors  or 
Minors,  on  fulfilment  of  the  requirements. 

6.  The  record  of  credits  for  Correspondence- 
Study  work  remains  in  the  Correspondence- 
Study  Department  until  the  student  is  formally 
admitted  to  the  University. 

7.  University  credit  is  given  for  University  Ex- 
tension work  :  (a)  to  students  presenting  a  cer- 
tificate for  a  course  of  twelve  lecture-studies  and 
passing  the  University  examination  in  that  sub- 
ject within  twelve  months  of  the  termination  of 
the  course;  and  (J?)  to  students  presenting 
course  certificates  for  Correspondence-Study 
work  and  passing  a  satisfactory  examination  in 
the  subject. 

8.  The  examination  in  the  Correspondence- 
Study  course  is  taken  at  such  time  as  is  most  con- 
venient to  the  student  and  the  instructor,  either 
at  the  University  or,  if  elsewhere,  under  super- 
vision which  has  been  approved  by  the  proper 
Dean  (see  Art.  VIII,  sec.  18). 

9.  University  Extension  work  is  not  credited 
for  more  than  one-third  of  the  work  required 
for  a  degree. 

10.  For  conditions  under  which  resident  stu- 
dents take  University  Extension  work,  see  Art. 
VII,  sees.  7  and  14. 

Section  8. —  For  general  fees  and  charges  in  the 
University  Extension  Division,  see  Art.  XIII, 
sec.  7. 

1.  Fees  are  payable  in  advance  and  are  not  re- 
funded in  case  the  student  is  unable  to  con- 
tinue the  work. 

2.  A  student  pays  for  but  one  Major  or  a  Dou- 
ble Major  (DMj)  course  at  one  time. 

3.  The  following  expenses  are  borne  by  patrons 
engaging  lecturers  :  traveling  expenses,  includ- 
ing berths  and  parlor-car  charges,  and  enter- 
tainment of  lecturer,  local  expenses  for 
advertising,  hall  rent,  printing,  and  minor  inci- 


66 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XVII 


dentals  of  lecture  courses,  the  regular  fees  for 
examinations  to  secure  University  credit,  trans- 
portation expenses  for  syllabi  and  traveling  or 
loan  libraries. 

4.  The  following  expenses  are  borne  by  the 
student  in  the  Correspondence  Department: 
postage  (both  ways)  on  papers  in  correspond- 
ence courses,  incidental  fee  in  correspondence 
courses  in  Botany  and  Zoology,  cost  of  text- 
books for  courses,  charge  of  one-quarter  of  the 
regular  fee  where  extension  of  time  limit  is  de- 
sired, the  regular  fees  when  examinations  are 
desired,  to  secure  University  credit. 

5.  The  party  engaging  the  library  pays  the 
transportation  expenses  for  loan  or  traveling 
libraries,  and  extension  centers  pay  the  trans- 
portation charges  for  syllabi. 

ARTICLE  XVII.  THE  UNIVERSITY  AFFILIATIONS. 

Section  i.  —  For  the  Officers  and  Ruling  Bodies 
of  this  Division,  see  Art.  II,  sees.  5  and  10,  and 
Art.  Ill,  sees.  6  and  9. 

1.  Each  affiliated  institution  is  presided  over 
by  a  Dean. 

2.  The  University  appoints  as  Advisory  Exam- 
iners such  instructors  in  approved  schools  as 
may  apply  for  such  appointment. 

a.  The  Advisory  Examiner  conducts  only 
the  examination  of  students  who  have  been 
under  his  own  instruction. 

b.  In  conducting  such  examinations,  he,  up- 
on the  completion  by  his  pupils  of  any  given 
course,  (i)  prepares  the  questions  or  topics 
which  constitute  the  examination  papers;  (2) 
conducts  a  written  examination  on  the  basis 
of  these  questions;  (3)  selects  the  good  pa- 
pers of  those  students  who  desire  to  have 
their  papers  read  at  the  University  and  pre- 
sents these  to  the  principal  of  the  school  for 
transmission  to  the  University,  together  with 
the  term  records  upon  the  same  work  for  the 
period  covered  by  the  examination. 

c.  The  papers  thus  transmitted  to  the  Uni- 
versity   are    submitted  to  the  Departmental 


Examiners,  and,  if  the  questions  set  for  the 
examination  are  approved  by  them,  are  read 
by  the  University  readers ;  and  the  record 
of  the  papers,  together  with  the  term  record 
of  the  pupil,  is  preserved  by  the  University. 
When  the  record  thus  gained  shows  the  com- 
pletion of  the  requirements  for  admission  to 
the  University,  the  student,  upon  graduation 
from  his  school,  is  given  a  full  certificate  of 
admission. 

d.  The  University  reserves  the  right  in  every 
particular  instance  (i)  to  refuse  acceptance 
of  the  questions  submitted  by  the  instructor, 
provided  they  are  not  satisfactory;  and  (2)  to 
omit  from  the  list  of  its  Advisory  Exami- 
ners the  name  of  an  instructor  whose  exami- 
nation papers  give  conclusive  evidence  of 
his  inability  to  teach  the  subject  indicated. 

e.  The  University  makes  a  charge  upon  the 
Affiliated  School  for  the  reading  of  the  ex- 
amination papers,  but  it  is  understood  the 
student  who  passes  the  examinations  and 
enters  the  University  pays  no  examination 
fee. 

3.  The  University  appoints  Departmental  Del- 
egates to  represent  the  Departments  in  their 
relationship  to  corresponding  Departments  of 
the  institutions. 

4.  The    University    appoints     officers    to    visit 
schools  to  determine  whether  such  schools  may 
be  placed  on  the  list  of  approved  schools. 
Section  2. —  Colleges    and  preparatory  schools 

are  admitted  into  affiliation  with  the  University 
through  the  Division  of  Affiliations,  either  as:  (a) 
organic  membership  in  the  University;  (J))  semi- 
organic  membership  in  the  University  ;  {c)  alliance 
of  completely  independent  institutions  with  the 
University  ;  or  {d)  tentative  affiliation. 

1.  Special  articles  of  application  are  agreed 
upon  in  each  case  between  the  University  and 
the  particular  institution  entering  into  affilia- 
tion on  the  basis  of  {a),  {b),  or  {c)  above. 

2.  Institutions  whose  work  has  been  duly  ap- 
proved may  be  admitted  to  affiliation  by  recom- 


Article  XVII 


THE  REGULATIONS 


67 


mendation  of  the  Board  of  Affiliations  and  the 
signature  of  the  proper  articles  of  affiliation. 
3.  An  institution  under  tentative  affiliation  is 
granted  full  affiliation  when  its  full  curriculum 
conforms  to  the  standards  maintained  for  the 
same  grade  of  work  in  the  corresponding 
Division  of  the  University. 

Section  3. — Secondary  schools  are  admitted  into 
co-operation  with  the  University  through  the 
Division  of  Affiliations,  as  follows  : 

1.  Schools  duly  approved  after  inspection  by 
two  visiting  officers  of  the  University  are  eli- 
gible to  admission  into  co-operation. 

2.  Upon  the  joint  recommendation  of  two  visit- 
ing officers  of  the  University,  and  upon  accept- 
ance by  the  Director  of  Co-operating  Work, 
the  Dean  of  Affiliations,  and  the  President  of 
the  University,  a  secondary  school  may  be  ad- 
mitted into  co-operation  by  vote  of  the  Board 
of  Affiliations. 

Section  4. — The  general  instructional  relations 
between  the  Affiliated  and  Co-operating  Schools 
and  the  University  are  defined  in  the  following 
regulations : 

1.  In  the  case  of  Co-operating  Schools: 

a.  Instruction  is  conformed,  as  far  as  possi- 
ble, to  the  standards  of  the  University. 

b.  The  University  admits  graduates  of  co- 
operating schools  upon  presentation  of  sub- 
ject certificates  signed  by  the  principal  and 
the  proper  instructors  of  the  school.  It  ap- 
points advisory  examiners  for  this  purpose. 
(See  sec.  i,  no.  2.) 

c.  The  University  considers  the  character  of 
the  University  work  of  graduates  of  co- 
operating schools  as  a  test  of  the  standards 
of  instruction  of  the  schools,  and  the  first 
year's  records  of  such  students  are  sent  to 
each  principal. 

2.  In  the  case  of  Affiliated  Schools : 

a.  Affiliated  institutions  conform  their  in- 
struction, as  far  as  possible,  to  the  standards 
of  the  University. 


b.  The  University  co-operates  with  the  affilia- 
ted institution  in  securing  properly  qualified 
teachers. 

c.  Instructors  are  appointed  only  upon  con- 
sultation with  the  University. 

d.  Affiliated  institutions  do  not  reappoint  in- 
structors declared  unsatisfactory  by  a  joint 
committee  of  the  University  and  the  institu- 
tion. 

e.  Affiliated  schools  refrain  from  extending 
the  curriculum  until  the  instruction  already 
offered  is  of  University  standard. 

f.  Affiliated  schools  may  publish  specific 
statements  of  the  extent  to  which  their 
instruction  is  fully  accepted  by  the  Uni- 
versity. 

g.  The  University  confers  upon  students  of 
affiliated  colleges  the  degrees,  titles,  and 
certificates  to  which  each  student  would 
be  entitled  if  in  the  Colleges  of  the  Uni- 
versity. 

h.  The  University  grants  diplomas  and 
degrees  conjointly  with  the  affiliated  college 
to  such  students  as  finish  their  college  course 
at  the  University,  the  names  of  such  students 
being  retained  in  the  catalogue  of  the  col- 
lege. 

Section  5.  —  The  University  furnishes  copies  of 
certain  of  its  publications  to  all  affiliated  institu- 
tions without  charge. 

1.  Publications  of  the  University  sent  to  all 
affiliated  schools  :  {a)  The  Annual  Register ;  (b) 
the  University  Record ;  (c)  Circulars  and  Bulle- 
tins of  Information ;  (d)  Summer  Circular;  {e) 
the  School  Review;  (/)  the  Biblical  World. 

2.  Affiliated  colleges  receive,  in  addition  to  the 
above  :  (;?)  the  Journal  of  Political  Economy; 
{h)  t\iQ  Journal  of  Sociology;  (i)  the  Journal  of 
Geology;  (/)  the  Botanical  Gazette;  and  (li) 
such  other  publications  as  the  college  may 
especially  request. 

3.  To  Rush  Medical  College  are  sent  (a),  {b), 
(.),  {d),  (.),  (/),  {g),  (h\  (y). 


68 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Article  XVII 


Section  6.  —  For  the  conditions  on  which  free 
tuition  is  granted  to  instructors  in  affiliated  schools 
see  Art.  XIII,  sec.  14,  no.  7. 

Section  7.  —  The  work  of  certain  Departments 
in  schools  not  otherwise  acceptable  may  be  accred- 
ited by  the  University.  In  this  case  a  proper 
certificate  is  given  to  the  instructor  in  such  De- 
partment. 

Section  8.  —  A  relation  of  supervision  is  held 
by  the  University  to  the  Chicago  Hospital  School 
for  nervous  and  delicate  children,  the  Depart- 
ments of  Philosophy  and  Neurology  assuming 
the  responsibility  therefor. 

Section  9.  —  College  work  in  affiliated  and  co- 
operating schools  is  recognized  by  the  University 
on  the  following  conditions  : 

1.  The  application  of  each  teacher  seeking  the 
privilege  of  offering  college  work  is  acted  upon 
by  the  Board  of  Affiliations  as  an  individual 
case. 

2.  The  privilege  depends  upon  the  joint 
approval  of  the  Departmental  Examiner  con- 
cerned and  the  Dean  of  Affiliations. 


3.  Such  advanced  work  is  not  encouraged  in 
the  secondary  school,  if  it  is  at  the  expense  of 
credit  necessary  for  admission. 

4.  Such  work  is  tested  by  examination,  the 
questions  upon  which  have  been  approved  and 
the  papers  read  and  graded  by  the  Depart- 
mental Examiner. 

5.  In  case  the  student  has  not  anticipated  col- 
lege credit  at  the  time  of  the  completion  of  his 
course  he  is  required  to  take  the  regular  class 
examination  at  the  University. 

Section  10.  —  Credit  for  advanced  standing  is 
given  to  students  from  affiliated  and  co-opera- 
ting secondary  schools  as  follows  : 

1.  It  is  given  at  the  rate  of  two  Majors  per 
unit. 

2.  Students  from  affiliated  secondary  schools 
are  credited  without  examination. 

3.  Students    from    co-operating    secondary 
schools  are  credited  only  upon  examination. 

Section  11. — For  fees  and  special  fiscal  privi- 
leges granted  to  affiliated  schools  see  Art.  XIII. 


INDEX. 


Absences 33 

From  first  Division  meeting 24 

How  counted  in  Gymnasium  work 23 

Academic  Year 17 

Academy  for  Boys : 

Admission  from,  to  University 18 

Laboratory  fee 56 

Organization 3 

Tuition  fee 55 

Acting  Heads  of  Departments 6 

Additional  Minor  required  for  absences 33 

Administrative  Boards  11 

Admission  : 

By  certificate 18,  19 

By  examination 18 

General  Regulations  for 18 

Admission  as  : 

Unclassified  student 20,  21,  22 

Honorary  student 22 

Admission  to 

Candidacy  for  higher  degrees 38  ff. 

College  of  Commerce  and  Administration 21 

College  of  Education 21 

Divinity  School 20 

Extension  work  64 

Graduate  Schools 19 

Junior  Colleges 18 

Law  School 20 

Medical  Course 21 

Senior  Colleges 19 

University  College 19 

Advanced  Standing,  credits  for 22,  30,  3 1 

To  students  from  affiliated  and  co-operating  second- 
ary schools  68 

Adviser,  College 7 

Library 7,  8,  12,  60,  62 

Affiliated  and  co-operating  schools  : 

Admission  from 18,  19 

Advanced  Standing  credit 22 

Affiliated  Colleges  and  academies,  instructors  receive 

free  instruction 56,  68 

Institutions  furnished  free  copies  of  official  publica- 
tions and  journals 36,  67 

Affiliations 4,  66 

Allied  organizations  in  Divinity  School 25 

Annual  Conference  of  Board  of  University  Affiliations 
with  high  schools  and  academies,  affiliated  and 

co-operating 14 

Contest  in  Oratory SI>  52 

Freshman-Sophomore  Debate 51 

University  Debate 52 

Appearance,  public,  of  students 48 


Applications  for  advanced  standing 22 

For  Fellowships 37 

Approved  colleges,  advanced  credit  for  students  from  28  f. 

Assignment  and  holding  of  Fellowships 37 

Of  Scholarships 36 

Assistance   rendered    by   holders   of    Scholarships    or 

Fellowships 37.  38 

Associate  title 38,  40 

Athletic  contests,  regulations  concerning  participation 

in 48 

Exhibitions  and  contests,  eligibility  for  appearance  in     49 

Bachelor's  gown 16 

Hood 16,  17 

Degree,  minimum  residence  for  obtaining 22 

Degree,  requirements  for 27,  38  ff. 

Bachelor  of  Divinity,  special  requirements 40,  41,  43 

Re-enactment  of  degree 45 

Bills,  payment  of 55,  56 

Binding  of  books 59 

Board  of  the  Senior  Colleges 10 

Board  of  Trustees 8,  55 

Board,  rooms  and 56,  57 

Books,  binding  of 59 

Publication  of 58 

Branch  Libraries 63 

Brief  of    candidate   for   final   examination  for  higher 

degree 42,  43 

Bulletin  board  notices 15 

"  C,"  the  University 54 

Calendar,  the 17 

Cancellation  of  absences  34 

Candidates  for  degrees, regulations  for  registration.  ...  23 
Candidacy  for  higher  degrees,  special  requirements. . . 

30,31,  38  ff. 

For  certificate,  title 38  ff. 

Cap  and  gown,  when  worn 16 

Certificate,  University  Extension 65 

Certificates 38 

Fee  for 56 

Change  of  Registration 24 

Chapel  Assembly,  attendance 17 

Chaplain,  position  and  duties  of 4 

Cheating,  penalty  for 35 

Chicago  Hospital  School  and  the  University 68 

Christian  Union,  organization  and  work  of  the  Board  of  13 

Claims  for  advanced  standing,  regulations  for 22 

Class  Day  exercises 17 


70 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Class  work  and  examination  graded  together 33 

Classical  Conference,  the  . . . ., 14 

Classification  of  Lecturers  and  Teachers 5 

Of  studies 23 

College  Adviser 7 

College    electives 1 8,  27 

College  of  Commerce  and  Administration,  the : 

Admission  to 21 

Courses  elected  by  candidates  for  degree  of  Ph.B.. . .  28 

Departments  of  instruction 25 

Faculty  of 31 

Organization 3 

Undergraduate  Course-Book 23 

College  of  Education,  the  : 

Admission  to 21 

Courses  of  instruction 25 

Degree  conferred  and  requirements  for 38  ff. 

Organization 3 

College  of  Science,  required  work  in 27 

Electives  displaced,  how  recovered 27 

College  work  in  affiliated  and  co-operating  schools 68 

Colleges,  affiliation  of 66 

Of  the  University 3 

Communication  of  examination  records  to  students. ...  5,  33 

"  Complete,"  meaning  of,  in  case  of  theses 41.42 

Concerts,  student 5° 

Conditions,  limit  of  removal 18 

Conferences  of  Departments 14 

Congregation,  the  University 8 

Contest  in  Oratory 51.52 

Convocation 17 

Co-operating  schools,  admission  from 18,  19 

Co-operation  in  case  of  secondary  schools 67 

Correspondence-Study  Department 64 

Correspondence  work: 

Examinations  in 32 

For  completion  of  incomplete  courses 24 

In  English  Theological  Seminary 31 

Registration  of  undergraduate  students  for 23 

Tuition  fees 55 

Council,  Student 46 

The  University 10 

Councilor,  eligibility  and  length  of  office  of  student.  .46,  47 

Counselor  of  a  University  House 53,  54 

Course-Book,  regulations  for  use  of  Undergraduate. ...  23 
Credit  for  advanced  standing  to  students  from  affiliated 

and  co-operating  secondary  schools 68 

For  University  Extension  work 65 

For  work  in  excess  of  the  admission  requirements. . .  22 

Reduced  or  lost  by  student's  absences 33 

Cumberland  Presbyterian  Divinity  House 25 

Curricula  of  Preparatory  and  Junior  College  work  com- 
bined   26 

Curriculum  Committees  in  Faculty  of  Junior  Colleges. .  10 
Curriculum  requirements  for  candidates  for  titles  and 

degrees 40 


Dano-Norwegian  Theological  Seminary,  the: 

Admission  to 20 

Certificates  awarded 38 

Departments  of  instruction 25 

Dean  in  a  College  or  School 5 

Dean  of  affiliations 19 

Of  a  College  or  School 5 

Of  the  Faculties  of  Arts,  Literature,  and  Science 5 

Of  Women 5 

Deans,  position  and    duties  of 4.23 

Declamation  contests 50 

Declaration,  subscribed  to  by  all  candidates  for  Univer- 
sity teams 49 

Deficiencies  in  Public  Speaking  removed  in  Senior  Col- 
leges       28 

Delinquents  in  Physical  Culture 35,  50 

Departmental  Delegates 66 

Examiner  passes  on  applications  for  advanced  stand- 
ing   22,  23 

Examiners 6,  1 2 

Libraries,  regulations  applying  to 60 

Publications 58 

Departments,  affiliation  of 68 

Honors  in 35 

Of  instruction 25 

Diploma,  fee  for 56 

Diplomas  and  certificates 38 

Director  of   the  University  Press 57,  58 

Directors,  position  and  duties  of 5 

Disciples'  Divinity  House 25 

Discipline,  absences,  and  examinations 33 

And  excuses 33 

Disqualification  of  students  from  public  appearance. .  .48  £f. 

Dissertation  of  candidates  for  higher  degrees 39,  42 

Work  in  collaboration  with  instructor 42 

Dissertations,  distribution  of 7,  42,  44,  63 

Divinity  Conference 14 

Divinity  Houses 15 

Divinity  School,  the : 

Admission  to 20 

Courses,  accepted  as  Senior  College  work 28,  29 

Degrees  conferred  in,  and  requirements  for 38  £f. 

Departments  of  Instruction 25 

Fees  for  tuition,  etc 55  ff- 

Organization 3 

Registration  in 23  ff. 

Student  affairs 46  ff. 

Student  Council  and  Councilors 46 

Work  of  the 30  f. 

Divinity  Student,  in  charge  of  church,  limit  of  Majors 

permitted  to 26 

Studies 58 

Division  Lectures 1 7,  27,  28 

Meetings 24 

Officers 24 

Divisions  of  the  University 3 


INDEX 


n 


Divisions,  student 24 

Docents,  position  and  duties  of 7 

Doctor  of  Philosophy,  candidacy  for  : 

Dissertation  requirements 42 

Requirements  in  the  Divinity  School 31,  41,  43 

Residence  requirements 40 

Special  requirements  in  the  Graduate  Schools 41 

Substitution  of  non-resident  work 30 

Doctor's  cap,  gown,  and  hood 16 

Degree,  candidacy  and  requirements  for 38  ff. 

Dissertations,  distribution  of 7,  42,  44,  63 

Double  Major  and  Double  Minor 25,  26 

Duties  and  privileges  of  instructors 6 

Duties  of  officers  of  the  University 4 

Editors   of  student   publications 48,  54 

Eighteen  Majors  the  work  of  the: 

Junior  Colleges 27 

Senior   Colleges 28 

Elective  courses  in  Senior  Colleges 28 

Electives  in   College  of  Science,  if  displaced,  how  re- 
covered        27 

Eligibility  to  : 

Public  appearance 48 

Membership  in  Houses 54 

Scholarships 36 

Emoluments,  honors  and 35 

Engineering    degrees,   holders   of,   as   candidates   for 

higher  degrees 38,  39 

Entrance  examinations,  date  of 17 

Regulations  for 19 

English  Theological  Seminary,  the : 

Admission  to 20 

Certificates   of 38,  40 

Work  of 31 

Examination  in  Correspondence  work 32 

Examinations 32 

Absence  from 33 

By  Advisory  Examiners 66 

Examiners,  Departmental 7,  66 

Advisory 66 

Examining  committees 41 

Exchange,  office  of  information  and 15 

Excuses 33.  34 

From  examinations  in  final  Quarter  in  Junior   and 

Senior  Colleges  32 

Ex  officio  members  of  administrative  University  Boards     12 
Extension  Division 3,  64 

Faculties  of  the  University 10 

Fees  for: 

Admission 55 

Change  in  registration 24,  55 

Diploma  re-enacting  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Divinity.     46 

Instruction 55 

Late  registration 24,  55 

Registration 55 

Special  examination 32,  55 

Tuition  in  Extension  Division 65 


Fellows,  duties  of 37,  38 

Quarterly  reports  of 37 

In  Divinity  School  debarred  from  church   or  outside 

work  for  compensation 37 

Fellowships,  assignment  and  holding  of 37 

Final  examination,  excuses  from 32,  34 

Examinations  for  degrees 38,  41 

Finals  in  debates,  etc 50-52 

First  Division  meetings,  excuses  for  absence  from 34 

Fiscal  matters 55.  58,  59 

Founder's  Day 17 

Four  Majors  of  work  in  one  Quarter  disapproved 43 

When  permitted 26 

Additional  fee  for 55 

Free  journals  furnished  to  affiliated  institutions 67 

Tuition 35 

French  and  German  required  of  candidates  for  Ph.B.  or 

S.B.  degree 27 

Of  candidates  for  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy. . .     39 

Freshman-Sophomore  debate 50 

"  Full  work,"  definition  of 26 

Function  of  Ruling  Bodies 8 

General  lectures,  hour  for 17 

Library,  regulations  applying  to 60 

Grades  of  excellence  for  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy     45 

Graduate  Divinity  School,  the  : 

Admission  to 20 

Candidacy  for  higher  degrees  in 30,  3 1 

Degrees  conferred,  and  requirements  for 38  ff. 

Departments  of  instruction 25 

Fellowships,  assignment  and  holding  of 37 

Preliminary  twelve  Majors 30 

Registration  in 23  ff. 

Scholarships,  assignment  and  holding  of 36 

Senior  College  work  counting  toward  D.B.  degree. . .     31 

Substitution  of  non-resident  work 31 

Work  of 30,  31 

Graduate  Schools,  the  : 

Absences 33,  34 

Admission  to 19 

Candidacy  and  Requirements  for  degrees 38  fif.  41 

Departments  of  instruction 25 

Fees  for  tuition,  etc 55  f- 

Fellowships,  assignment  and  holding  of 37 

Honors  and  emoluments 35 

Organization 3 

Scholarships,  assignment  and  holding  of 36 

Selection  of  courses 23,  30 

Seminars 33 

Student  Council  and  Councilors 46  f. 

Graduation  with  thirty-three  Majors'  credit 28 

Group  Libraries 62 

Gymnasium  work,  registration  for 23 

Requirements  waived 19 

Haskell  Library,  special  regulations  for 63 

Head  of  a  Department,  position  and  duties  of 5.  6 

Of  a  University  House 53.  54 


^2 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Historical  Conference,  the 14 

History,  two  Majors  in,  required  for  graduation 28 

One  (or  two)  Major(s),  displaced  by  substitution  ....      29 

Holidays,  official  University 17 

Honorable  mention  in  Colleges 35 

Honorary  degrees  of  Doctor  of  Divinity  and  Doctor  of 

Laws 38,  45 

Students,  admission  of 22 

Honors  and  emoluments 35 

Hood,  regulation  concerning 16,  17 

Houses,  University,  see  University  Houses. 

Divinity 15 

"  Incomplete  courses,"  becoming  conditions 48 

Incomplete  work,  how  completed 24 

Information  and  Exchange,  Office  of 15 

Inspector,  Library 7,  8,  61,  62 

Instruction 24  ff' 

By  correspondence 64 

Fees  for 55 

Instructional  relations  between  affiliated  and  co-operat- 
ing schools  and  the  University 67 

Instructors,  duties  and  privileges 6 

Intercollegiate  Debate,  choice  of  speakers 53 

Games 49 

Journals  of  the  University 58 

Judges  in  Debates,  etc 51-53 

Junior  College  Faculty 10 

Junior  Colleges,  the  : 

Absences 33 

Admission  to 18 

Assignment  and  holding  of  Scholarships 36 

Conditions,  limit  of  removal 18 

Curricula  of  Preparatory  and  Junior  College  work. .  .  26 

Departments  of  Instruction 25 

Discipline,  absences,  and  excuses 33 

Division  lectures 27 

Divisions 24 

Entrance  examinations 19 

Excuses 33'  34 

Fees  for  tuition,  etc 55  f. 

Final  examinations 32 

Graduation 38 

Honors  and  emoluments 35 

Limitation  of  number  in  classes 33 

Major  and  Minor  courses 26 

Organization 3 

Quarterly  examinations 32 

Requirements    of    work   for    students   entering  from 

approved  colleges 28 

Student  affairs 46 

Student  Council  and  Councilors 35,  46 

Substitutions  allowed  in 29 

Undergraduate  Course-Book 23 

Warnings  for  unsatisfactory  work 34 

Work  of  the 27 

Laboratory  fees 55,  56 

Laboratory  note-books,  presented  at  admission 18 


Late  registration  24 

Latin,  required  of  candidates  for  S.B.  Degree 27 

Law  School 3 

Degrees  conferred,  and  requirements  for 3^  ff- 

Departments  of  Instruction 25 

Fees  for  tuition,  etc 55 

Registration  and  selection  of  courses 23 

Standing  committees 1 1 

Lecture-Study  courses,  fees  for 55 

Lecture-Study  Department 64 

Study  courses 64 

Lecturers  and  teachers,  classification  of 5 

Librarian,  position  and  duties 7 

Libraries,  Laboratories,  and  Museums 4.  59 

Library  adviser 7,  8,  12,  60,  62 

Fees 56 

Fines  and  payment 33>  5^)  60 

Inspector 7,  8,  61,  62 

Officers 7.  8 

Limit  of  credits  for  advanced  standing 22 

Limitation  of  exemption  from  final  examinations 32 

Of  number  of  students  in  a  class 33 

Limitations  in  number  of  courses 18,  23,  26 

Of  elective  courses  in  Senior  Colleges 28 

Loan  libraries 63 

Lower  Juniors 3>  24 

Seniors 3>  24 

Mailing  of  official  documents 59 

Majors  and  Minors 25,  26 

Marshals 35>  47 

Master   of   Arts    in    Divinity  School,  special    require- 
ments   40.  43 

Master's  degree,  candidacy  and  requirements  for 38  £f. 

Gown 16 

Hood 16 

Matriculation  fee 55 

Medical  affairs.  Board  of I3 

Council  and  councilors 4^ 

Medical  Course  : 

Admission  to 21 

Substitutions  allowed 29 

Tuition  fee 55 

Medical  Course  students I9 

Medical  missionary  students 3' 

Military  companies,  organization,  membership, and  work     27 

Science  and  Tactics  in  lieu  of  required  Physical  Cul- 
ture       27 

Regulations  governing  the  work 27 

Minimum  of  residence  for  higher  degrees 3° 

For  Bachelor's  degree 22 

Modern  Language  Conference 14 

Museums,  administration  of 65 

Libraries,  Laboratories,  and 4>  59 


INDEX 


73 


Music,  required  work  in  Graduate  Divinity  School. ...      31 
Musical  clubs,  organization  and  management 5° 

Non-resident  work,  credit  for 30,  31,  40,  41 

Non-specialist  Master's  degree 40,  43 

Normal  work  of  student  for  Quarter 26 

"  Not  passed  " 33 

Officers  of  the  University,  their  position  and  duties.  ...  4 

Official  documents 59 

Dress 16 

Etiquette 16 

Publications,  distribution  of IS 

Publications  and  Journals,  furnished  free  of  charge  35,  67 

Tutors 7 

Organization  of  students,  rules  governing 53 

Payment  of   bills SSi  57 

Permanent  officers  of  the  University 5,9 

Penalty  for  absences , 33 

For  delinquency,  cheating,  etc 34,  35 

Phi  Beta  Kappa  meeting 17 

Philosophy,  two  Majors  in,  required  for  graduation  .  ...      28 

One  (or, two)  Major(s)  displaced  by  substitution 29 

Physical  examination,  and  excuse  for  absence 34 

Physical  Culture  and  Athletics,  Board  of 46 

Physical  Culture  : 

Credit  to  students   in  absentia 29 

Delinquents 35,  50 

Excuses  from 34 

In  Junior  Colleges 27 

In  Senior  Colleges 28 

Requirements 28 

Position  and  duties  of  officers  of  the  University 4 

Pre-legal  course,  admission  to 20 

Preliminaries,  rules  for,  in  all  contests  and  debates.  .  ..50,  51 

Preparatory  and  Junior  College  work  combined 26 

Schools,  affiliation  of 66 

Work,  advanced  standing  for 22 

Prescribed  Units 18 

President,  position  and  duties  of 4 

Press 4.  57 

Principal    and    secondary    subjects    of    candidates    for 

Doctor's  degree 41 

Printing  of  thesis,  requirements  for 44 

Privileges  of  instructors 6 

Of  library 59 

Prizes  for  contests  in  Public  Speaking 36 

For  annual  contest  between  students  of  affiliated  and 

co-operating  schools 36,  37 

Procedure,  Rules  of,  for  Ruling  Bodies 8 

Professional  course,  admission  to  : 

In  Law  School 20 

In  College  of  Education 21 

Professional  schools 3 

Public  appearance  of  students 48 


Public  speaking,  deficiency  in,  removed  in  Senior  Col- 
leges       28 

Eligibility  for  appearance  in 48,  49 

In  Junior  Colleges 27 

Publication  of  books 58 

Publications,  student,  regulations  governing 54 

Quarter 17 

Quarterly  examinations 17,  32 

Quarterly   registrations 23 

Quarterly  report  of  Fellows 37 

Of  University  Houses 54 

Reception,  Convocation 17 

Recommendation  of  Teachers,  Board  for  the 12 

Recommendation  for  higher  degrees 44 

Recorder,  position  and  duties  of 4 

Records  of  contests  in  Public  Speaking 53 

Re-enacted  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Divinity 45,  46 

Regents'  certificates  from  the  state  of  New  York 19 

Register  of  engagements,  where  kept 16 

Registrar,  position  and  duties  of 4,  23,  55 

Registration,  classification,  and  selection  of  studies...      23 

Fees 55 

Regular  and  special  scholarships 36 

Removal  of  officers  of  instruction  and  governments.  . .       8 

Reports  of  instructors 6 

Required  vi^ork  : 

How  displaced  by  substitution 29 

In  Graduate  Divinity  School 30,  31 

In  Junior  Colleges 26,  27 

In  Philosophy  and  History 28,30 

In  Senior  Colleges 28 

Limit  of  substitution  for 29 

Requirements  for  admission 18  ff. 

For  admission  to  candidacy  for  a  higher  degree  ....  38  ff. 

Requirements  canceled 28,  29 

Residence  in  a  Hall,  rules  for 54 

Residence  requirements,  in  case  of  candidates   for  title 

or  degrees 38,  39,  40 

Rooms  and  board 56,  57 

Rosters  of  office  hours,  rooms  etc.,  where  kept 15 

Rules  of  Procedure  of  Ruling  Bodies 8 

Ruling  Bodies  :  their  scope,  function,  and  rules  of  pro- 
cedure         8 

Scholarships,  assignment  and  holding  of 36 

As  prizes  in  annual  contest  in  Public  Speaking 37 

To  members  of  the  Faculties  or  their  wives 36,  37 

"  School,"  its  meaning 3 

School  of  Education 3 

Faculty  of 1 1 

Standing  and  General  Committees 11 

Tuition  fees 55 

Schools,  Colleges,  and  Academies 3 

Scope,  function  and  rules  of  procedure  of  Ruling  Bodies  8 


74 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


Second  Examination  to  make  up  a  condition 32,  33 

Secondary  Schools  admitted  into  co-operation 67 

Secret  Organizations,  limitation  of  membership  in....      53 

Secretaries  of  Extension  Division  Departments 64 

Selection  of  studies 23 

Semi-finals  in  debates,  etc 5i,  52 

Semi-official  organizations 13 

Seminars : 

Admission  of  undergraduate  students 23 

Character  of  work,  members  and  instructor 33 

Determination  of  credit  value  for -  26 

Hours  for 17 

Senate,  the  University 9 

Senior  College  work  counting  toward  D.B.  degree 31 

Senior  Colleges,  the : 

Absences 33 

Admission  to 19 

Assignment  and  holding  of  scholarships 36 

Board  of  the 10,  11 

Departments  of  Instruction 25 

Discipline,  absences  and  excuses 33 

Divinity  School  courses  accepted  as  Senior  College 

work 28,  29 

Division  Lectures 28 

Divisions 24 

Excuses 33.  34 

Fees  for  tuition,  etc 55  f- 

Final  examinations 52 

Graduation,  including  candidacy  and  requirements 

for  degrees 38  ff. 

Honors  and  emoluments 35 

Limitation  of  students  in  a  class 32 

1-imitations  of  elective  courses 38 

Organization 3 

Quarterly  examinations 32 

Requirements  for  Bachelor's  degree 28 

Student  affairs 46  £f. 

Student  Council  and  Councilors 35,  46 

Substitutions  allowed 29 

Undergraduate  Course-Book 23 

Warnings  for  unsatisfactory  work 34 

Work  of 28 

Sermon,  Convocation 17 

Six    Majors  of  Science   work    required  in  College  of 

Science 27 

Social  functions,  regulations  for  governing 54 

Special  examinations   during    final  Quarter  of  under- 
graduate student 32 

Examination  of  Classes 32 

Examinations  for  Scholarships 36 

Examinations,  when  permitted 6.  32 

Honors  in  Departments 35 

Regulations  for  candidacy  for  higher  degrees 39 

Specialist  Master's  degree 40,  43 

Standing  committees  in  : 

Faculties  of  Arts,  Literature,  and  Science 10,  11 

Junior  Colleges 10,  11 

Law  School II 

School  of  Education 11 


Standing  group  committees  in: 

Arts,  Literature,  and  Science  Faculties 10 

Junior  College  Faculty , 10 

State  normal  schools,  graduates  of,  admitted  to  Senior 

Colleges 19 

Student  affairs 46 

And  messenger  service 15 

Council 46 

Councilors 35i  4^ 

Councilors,  absences  granted  to 34,  47 

Delegates  to  annual  conference  of  the  Y.  M.  C.  A., 

excused  for  absence 34 

Organizations,  Publications,  and  Exhibitions,  Board 

of 46.  S3.  54 

Administrative  Board  of 12,  13,  46 

Representatives  on  Board  of  Physical  Culture  and 

Athletics 12 

"  Subject,"  meaning  of  the  word,  in  case  of  substitution 

offered 29 

Substitutions: 

Allowed  in  work  of  the  Colleges 29,  38 

Allowed  in  work  of  the  Medical  Course 29 

For  admission  Latin 26,  27 

In  case  of  Junior  College  students  entering  from  ap- 
proved colleges 28 

Non-resident   work    by   candidates    for    higher   de- 
grees  30.  38  ff. 

Summer  Quarter,  hours  in  Major  and  Minor  course ....     26 

Sunday  service 18 

Superintendent  of  Departmental  Libraries 7,  8 

Suspension  of  students 34,  35 

Swedish  Theological  Seminary : 

Admission  to   20 

Certificates  awarded 38 

Departments  of  instruction 25 

Tardiness,  occasional ;  habitual 33 

Tentative  and  full  affiliation 67 

Tenure  of  office  of  instructors 5 

Term 17 

Terminology  of  recording  the  work  of  students 32 

Theses  and  examinations 4 1  ff. 

Deposited  in  Library 44 

Three-Major  courses  the  normal  work  of  student 26 

Time  allowed  in  debates  and  public  speaking  con- 
tests   51-53 

Time  of  final  examinations 42 

Title  page,  required  in  dissertations 42,  43 

Traveling  (loan)  Libraries 63 

Library  Department  of  Extension  Division 64,  66 

Trimmings  of  hoods 16,  17 

Trustees,  Board  of 6,  55 

Tuition  fees 55 

Tutors,  official 7 

Two  Majors'  work,  students  limited  to 26 


INDEX 


75 


Unclassified  students : 

Admission  20,  21,  22 

And  public  appearance 48,  49 

Regulations  for 29,  30 

Undergraduate  students : 

Admission 18  ff. 

Degrees  conferred  and  requirements  for 38  ff. 

Departments  of  instruction 25 

Divisions 24 

Quarterly  and  final  examinations 32,  33 

Registration,  classification  and  selection  of  studies  .  .23ff. 

Substitutions  allowed 29 

Work  of 25  ff. 

See  Junior  Colleges ;  Senior  Colleges 

Union,  the  Christian 13 

Unit,  value  of 18 

Units  required  for  admission  to  Junior  Colleges 1 8 

United  Faculties  of  Arts,  Literature,  and  Science 10,  1 1 

University  Choir  and    University    Band,  reduction   of 

tuition  fees 35 

University  College 3 

Admission  to 19 

Work  of 30 

University  debate 52 

Divisions  of  the 3 

Extension  lectures,  fees  for  admission  to 55 

University  High  School 3,  55 

Admission  from 18 


University  Houses  : 

Constituency  and  organization 53 

Director  of 12 

University  Press 57  ff- 

Teams,  rules  governing 49  ff- 

Upper  Juniors 3,24 

Seniors 3,24 

Veto  of  the  President 9,  lo 

Violation  of    requirements  of   the  University,  penalty 

for 34.  35 

Visiting  committees 14 

Visiting  officers  of  the  University 66,  67 

Warnings  for  unsatisfactory  work 34 

Weekly  Chapel  Assemblies I7>  18 

Withdrawal  notices 24 

Of  students  before  end  of  quarter  or  term 24 

Work  accepted  for  admission  to  Junior  Colleges 18 

Work  of  the  : 

Extension  division 64 

Graduate  Divinity  School 30 

Graduate  Schools  of  Arts,  Literature,  and  Science. . .  30 

Junior  Colleges 27 

Medical  Course 29 

Senior  Colleges 28 

University  College 30 


